WO2007037445A1 - Unit of ink cartridges - Google Patents
Unit of ink cartridges Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2007037445A1 WO2007037445A1 PCT/JP2006/319609 JP2006319609W WO2007037445A1 WO 2007037445 A1 WO2007037445 A1 WO 2007037445A1 JP 2006319609 W JP2006319609 W JP 2006319609W WO 2007037445 A1 WO2007037445 A1 WO 2007037445A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- ink
- supply
- ambient air
- case
- ink cartridge
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/1752—Mounting within the printer
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17553—Outer structure
Definitions
- the present invention is related to a unit of ink car specifically to a unit of ink cartridges, which reduces the number of co costs for manufacturing ink cartridges having different outer sizes Background Art
- Th chamber of the ink cartridge may store color ink such as yellow in magenta ink for performing color printing
- Three ind cartridges may be provided for storing yellow ink, cyan ink and respectively
- a single ink cartridge may include three ink storing storing yellow ink, cyan ink and magenta ink respectively in one b cartridge for black ink may include an ink storing chamber which capacity as that of an ink cartridge for yellow, cyan and magent include an ink storing chamber which has twice the capacity as t cartridge for yellow, cyan and magenta ink
- the ink c different amount of ink stored in the ink storing chamber for diffe accordance with a consumed amount of the ink, and the ink cartridge outer size in accordance with a different size of the ink storing cha cartridges are disclosed in JP 07 108688
- ink cartridges for storing a plurality of color inks such as normal c cyan ink, normal magenta ink and light magenta ink in additio cartridges for storing yellow ink, cyan ink and magenta ink
- the first and the third ink cartridge have a different height direction of the extended wall Further, since the second ink cartridg first casing member of the first ink cartridge connected with the member of the third ink cartridge, the second ink cartridge has an ou is different from the outer sizes of the first and third ink cartridge members, two of which form the casing of the first ink cartridge and t which form the casing of the third ink cartridge, can provide three cartridges each of which has different size in the height direction of wall Therefore three different cartridges, each of which has differ can be manufactured with four casing members Compared to the t cartridges which are manufactured with two specific molded casing each cartridge (six casing members are required to be molded in total of components can be reduced and costs are also reduced
- the passage for supplying ink from the ink storing chamber can be formed by connecting the first cutaway portions of the first c and the second casing member to each other Therefore, the passage ink from the ink storin chamber to the outside is formed sim l b c cartridge may be the same as the height of the extended wall of the member of the first ink cartridge, and the height of the extended w casing member of the third cartridge may be the same as the height o wall of the second casing member of the third ink cartridge Accordin of dies for molding the casing members can be commonly formed so th forming the dies can be reduced
- the difference between the height of the extended wall of t member of the first ink cartridge and the height of the extended wal casing member of the third ink cartridge may be different from between the height of the extended wall of the second casing member cartridge and the height of the extended wall of the second casing third ink cartridge Therefore, four ink cartridges having four differe can be manufactured by connecting the four casing memb manufacturing a plurality of ink cartridges, costs can be further reduc
- the first casing member of the first ink cartridge may have a rib e the plate member along a height direction of the extended wall, where the rib corresponds to the difference between the height of the extend first casing member of the first ink cartridge and the height of the ex the first casing member of the third ink cartridge Therefore, the first cartridges have the same inner space size, although having differen
- the ink cartridges having different outer sizes and ha ink storing chamber in capacity can be manufactured
- th is a pigment based ink
- the ink cartr ink is formed distinguishably in shape from other ink cartridges for prevent the erroneous mounting of ink cartridges
- the ink cartridge storin a lar e amoun mechanism which opens and closes the penetration opening accommodation space for accommodating
- the cutaway portion for forming the penetr is formed in the same shape for each of the casing members and the extended wall of the first casing member is larger than the height of wall of the second casing member Due to the shape of the cutaway similar, the shape of the die for molding each of the casing members i reduces the costs for designing the dies Due to the height of the e being different for the first casing member and the second casing me cartridge can be manufactured by combining a first casing member o cartridge and a second casing member of a smaller ink cartridge, further dies are required for the ink cartridge Brief Description of Drawings
- FlG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the device of the present invention
- FlG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
- FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill opened
- FlG 4 is a cross sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figur IV IV line
- FlG 5 is a cross sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figur
- FlG 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the door of the refill
- FlG 7 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of cartridge
- FlG 8 is an angled diagram showing the details of the color ink cart FlG 9 IS a dia ram showin the rotector where (a) is a to surface d FlG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capa cartridge
- FlG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is the ink reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reser
- FlG 15 is a diagram showing the supply path formation part, w diagram showing a summary of the supply path formation pa of the frame part), (b) is a cross sectional diagram showing th formation part in Figure 15(a) along the XVb XVb line, (c) showing the state in which the amount of ink has been reduce diagram showing the completion of the ink supply
- FlG 16 IS a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, angled diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path f
- (b) is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part i along the arrow XVIb perspective
- (c) is a diagram showin air path formation part in Figure 16(a) along the arrow XVIc p
- FlG 17 is a diagram showing the injection path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the injection path formation p a cross sectional diagram of the injection path formation part i along the XVIIb XVIIb line
- FlG 18 is a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) showing a summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a c diagram of the detection part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIII and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the detection part in along the XVIIIc XVIIIc line
- FlG 19 is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a fron sensor arm and (b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in along the arrow XIXb perspective
- FlG 20 is a dia ram showin one art of the ink reservoir element mechanism
- FlG 23 is a diagram showing the supply cap where (a) is a diagra side of the supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surfac cap in Figure 23(a) along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply cap, (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the supply cap and (e) is a cross sectional d supply cap in Figure 23(c) along the XXIIIe XXIIIe line
- FlG 24 is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar supply joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the supply joint in Figu the XXIVd XXIVd line
- FlG 25 is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply valve, (b) is a diagram showing the side of th in Figure 25(a) along the arrow XXVb perspective, (c) is a dia the planar surface of the supply valve, (d) is a diagram showi surface of the supply valve, and (e) is a cross sectional diagram valve in Figure 25(c) along the XXVe XXVe line
- FlG 26 is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) showing the side of the first supply spring (b) is a diagram planar surface of the first supply spring, (c) is a diagram showi surface of the first supply spring, and (d) is a cross sectional d first supply spring in Figure 26(b) along the XXVId XXVId line
- FlG 27 is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply slider (b) is a diagram showing the side slider in Figure 27(a) along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply slider (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the su l slider and (e) is a cross sectional side of the check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar check valve, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the check valve in Figu the XXIXd XXIXd line
- FlG 30 is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram show the cover, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the diagram showing the bottom surface of the cover, and (d) is a c diagram of the cover in Figure 30(b) along the XXXd XXXd line
- FlG 31 IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing t ambient air cap in Figure 3l(a) along the arrow XXXIb persp diagram showing the planar surface of the ambient air cap, (d) showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cap a cross sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in Figure 3l XXXIe XXXIe line
- FlG 32 is a .diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) showing the side of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showi surface of the ambient air joint, (c) is a diagram showing the b of the ambient air joint, and (d) is a cross sectional diagram o air joint in Figure 32(b) along the XXXIId XXXIId line
- FlG 33 is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showi surface of the ambient air valve
- FlG 34 is a partial cross sectional diagram showing the state in w supply mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanis assembled into the ink supply unit and the ambient air intake
- FlG 35 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes prior to film mechanism onto the frame part (b) is a diagram showing reducing process, and (c) is a diagram showing the ink injectio
- FlG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, diagram showing the process to sandwich the frame part by th is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the case
- FlG 39 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that prior to shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagra process to attach the protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showi to package the ink cartridge using the packaging unit
- FlG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink ca multifunction device
- FlG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartri attached to the multifunction device
- FlG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm corres amount of ink remaining within the ink reservoir chamber, w the state in which there is ink remaining, and (b) shows the s there is no ink remaining
- FlG 43 is a diagram showing the operation theory of the diagrammatically
- FlG 44 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the has been attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong o
- FlG 45 is a diagram showing the method of removing the ink cartr inkjet recording device
- FlG 46 is a diagram showing the front perspective of the ink cart state in which it is removed from the multifunction device
- FlG 47 is a diagram showing the structure to reduce adherence of th detection surface of the detection part of the ink cartridge, wh the state in which the ink cartrid e has been removed from the case, where (a) is a cross sectional diagram showing a summa in Figure 48(a) along the XXXXIXa XXXXIXa line, a cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the case in Figu the XXXXIXb XXXIXb line
- FlG 50 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which each has been attached within the case
- FlG 51 is a diagram showing the combination of the ca diagrammatically
- FlG 52 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit acc second example of embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showi the ink cartridge according to the second example of embodime diagram showing the cross section of the state in which the ink been attached within the refill unit
- FlG 53 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third and fourth examples of embodiment, w angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third example of embodiment, and (b) is an a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
- FlG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
- FlG 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the according to the fifth example of embodiment has been attach refill unit
- FlG 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the according to the sixth example of embodiment has been attach refill unit
- FlG 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the electrical st diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cartridg the eighth example of embodiment FlG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit ac ninth example of embodiment FlG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the tenth example of embodiment FlG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartrid the tenth example of embodiment
- FlG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink
- FlG 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to example of embodiment
- FlG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
- FlG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
- FlG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
- Figure 1 is an oblique vie appearance of multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 o invention is installed
- Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction scanner part 12 is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 device 1 is an MFD (Multi Function Device) in which printer part 1 part 12 are provided as a unit, and it has various functions such function, scanner function, copy function, and facsimile function
- Multifunction device 1 is rimaril connected to a com uter (ext equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loading v recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the dev data such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recordi
- printer part 11 is configured as an ln device, and refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recor illustrated in the figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is eq base of the front surface of multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 design and is configured such that ink cartridge 14 can be easily repl will be described in detail below
- Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which function (Flatbed Scanner) and document cover 16, which is provided on the this document bed 15 (top of figure l)
- Document cover 16 is e automatic document feeder (ADF Auto Document Feeder, called 'A 17, and it is attached to the back side of document bed 15 (back sid using a hinge such that it can be freely opened and closed Theref cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating in the direction of arrow A document bed 15
- document bed 15 constitutes a housing of multifunction device 1
- document cover 16 constitute the top surface of multifunction device 1
- Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illu figure) between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is an image reading unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside placed between document cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, a reading unit reads images from the document by moving along the sheet from the bottom of the contact glass sheet
- Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is co that it can consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of doc document tra 18 to a er e ection tra 19 Moreover, ADF 17 multifunction device 1 (front side of Figure l) and on the b multifunction device 1 (bottom side of Figure l) In other words re built in to the front surface Ia side and the bottom surface Ib side of device 1
- refill unit 13 is configured such that it hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan stored in each of these ink cartridges 14 The ink of each color cartridges 14 is supplied to the recording head through ink tube 53 (s
- opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening the end of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure l) is p front surface of refill unit 13 (front of Figure l) Opening/closin configured such that it can be freely rotated between a position in w refill unit 13 through opening 21 and a position in which it closes o houses refill unit 13 by folding it over to the front (front direction in F
- Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifun and a paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned insid 22 (in Figure 1, the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged i After the recording paper that is sent from the paper feed tray is se side it is sent to the top and finally fed to the front side, and image onto the recording paper while the recording paper is fed The recor then discharged to a paper ejection tray (not illustrated in the fi provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside opening 22
- Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front s multifunction device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure l) panel 30 is an operation part for the purpose of performing the operati part 11 and scanner part 12 and it is equipped with various operati and liquid crystal display part 35
- the various operation keys 31 3 operation panel 30 are connected to a control device (or a control circ illustrated in the figure) used as a control means for controlling m Slot part 23 through which recording media such as various small can be loaded is equipped on the bottom of operation panel 30 (botto Image data is stored on the small memory card, and the image data ( related to image data) that is read out from the small memory card i liquid crystal display part 35
- the device is configured such that ar displayed on liquid crystal display 35 can then be recorded to recordin operation of operation panel 30
- FIG. 3 is a side view of the state in w refill unit 13 has been opened
- Figure 4 is a cross sectional view of through line IV IV of Figure 2
- Figure 5 is a cross sectional view of refill unit 13 throu Figure 2
- the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illus 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 41 of refill unit 13 Fig illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is removed
- each accommodating chamber 50 that house and hold ink cartridges 14 are partitioned and formed on this embodiment, case 40 has four accommodating chambers 50 ? cartridges 14 are inserted into and removed from each accommodatin
- the inner wall surface shape of each accommodating chamber 50 i that it demarcates space corresponding to the outside shape of ink car when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is held inside ca rattling
- case 40 is equipped with bottom plate late arts 43 that are rovided on the left and ri ht sides of this bott direction
- partition walls 47 are formed i provided from the top and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling Further, partition wall parts 47 do not need to completely p accommodating chamber 50, so they may be of any shape as long protrudes to the inside from at least one of bottom plate part 42 or DC 44 and divides the space between adjacent accommodating chambers
- cutout part 40a opening opened is formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure forming member 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a Needle member) that extracts the ink inside ink cartridges 14 is formed on n member 48 based on the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in a chambers 50 of case 40
- needle 49 extends along the direction of case 40 and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installatio the state in which needle forming member 48 is engaged with cut
- ink supply part 120 see Figure 8
- ink cartridge supply path is formed as supply valve 620 (see Figure 22) of ink supp 500 (see Figure 22) is pressed
- Needle 49 communicates with ink extr 52 that projects upward on the back side of case 40 (right side of Figu tube 53 is connected to this ink extraction opening 52
- Ink tube 53 is c mkjet recording head (not illustrated in the figure), and it is able to s inside ink cartridges 14 to the inkjet recording head
- Passage 54 which introduces ambient air into ink cartridges 14 the side wall of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure ink inside ink cartridges 14 is extracted through needle 49, corresponding to the extracted ink passes through passage 54 and is ink cartridges 14 cartridge 14 is also given below
- Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is position corresponding to detection part 140 (see Figure 8) of ink cart state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommodating cha is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and light 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge 14 accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detec is connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stor cartridge 14 is constantly monitored by this control device
- Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves case 40 Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm m A tension spring is attached between swing arm mechanism 44b an part 44, and swing arm mechanism 44b is always elastically biased i of door 41 (front left side of Figure 2, left side of Figures 3 5) Swing ar 44b is configured such that the ends that project into case 41 (a chamber 50) engage with latch parts 217a and 227a (see Figure 8) of 14, for example, in the state in which it is elastically biased It is ther to reliably hold ink cartridge 14 that is installed in case 40
- Opening 45 is provided on the front surface of case 40 (insertion which ink cartridge 14 is installed) This opening 45 is provided o accommodating chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating c successively provided inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four 14 are res ectivel inserted into and removed from each accommoda accommodating chamber 50, and when door 41 is in the open position, 14 can be easily inserted into and removed from accommodating cha
- Door 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining m is provided on this door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock ba (locks) door 41 to case 40, and lock release lever 63 that releases do fastened state
- Door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61, doo 62 and lock release lever 63 are each molded using resins
- door main body 60 is roughly formed i the shape of a long and thin rectangle
- the external shape of door m formed according to the shape of opening 45 of case 40
- Speci part 42a is formed on the front end of bottom plate part 42 of case 40 ( 3, and 4), and rotating shaft part 64 is fitted into this bearing part 42 can rotate freely
- door main body 60 can close opemng 45 b or open opening 45 by folding over
- Pullout member 65 which is formed as a unit with door mai provided on the bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout roughly formed into an L shape, and it has extension part 65a and cu Extension part 65a is successively provided on the bottom end of door (rotating shaft part 64), and curved part 65b is successively provide approximately 90° angle with extension part 65a
- Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides in onto installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the door 41 is in the open position
- pullout member 65 functiono a member for pulling ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber a guiding member when inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodatin
- pullout members 65 are provided on e body 60
- pullout members 65 are configured such positioned opposite the width direction of door main body 60 an cartridge 14 by sandwiching it in the width direction Moreover in thi the spacing between each of the pullout members 65 is set to be sm width direction of ink cartridge 14
- Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member protrudes to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodati which claw 61a is housed, is provided on door main body 60
- Claw ac part 60a is configured from a groove that extends in a direction t perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of door main body 60 (ver in Figure 6)
- Claw 61a is fitted into claw accommodating part 60a su slide freely, so pressing retaining member 61 is supported such that i and retreat in a direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal dir main body 60
- pressing retaining member 61 can ch between a projected position in which it is raised from the inside s main body 60 (state illustrated in Figure 3) and a retreated position i retreated from the projected position to the side of door main b illustrated in Figure 4)
- coil spring 66 is placed betw retaining member 61 and door main body 60 Therefore, pressin reta cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positioned with
- pressing retaining member 61 is formed in flat plate, while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 6 makes contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when doo blocked position) is formed into a flat surface, and a pair of projectin formed on this wall surface 61b Therefore, when door 41 is in the blo these strips 61c make contact with and press against the side s cartridge 14
- pressing retaining member 61 is configured such that blocked position it presses slightly downward from the center p vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4) I pressing retaining member 61 is provided in a position in which it and presses downward from the center position in the vertical di cartridge 14 This is for the purpose of improving the operationahty which the user operates door 41
- pressing retaini is positioned at or above the center position in the vertical direction o 14
- the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of lock relea the distance between the part that is operated by the user and retaining member 61 becomes small Therefore, the force induced by of pressing retaining member 61 becomes large, and a force that is la operate door 41 therefore becomes necessary
- retaining member 61 is positioned below the center position in the ver of ink cartridge 14, the distance between the part that is operated by pressing retaining member 61 is large, so the user is able to operate small amount of force
- pressing retaining member 61 too far downward in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 it
- a biasing force first and second supply springs 630 and 650 and fir ambient air springs 730 and 750
- the valves supply ambient air valve 720
- the el pressing retaining member 61 of this embodiment is set such that it the elastic force of the valve mechanisms of ink supply part 120 an intake part 130
- the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is reliably ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14
- Moreov part 120 is on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on t the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating c
- Door lock member 62 is attached to the top end of door main unit top side in Figure 6)
- Door lock member 62 has main shaft part 62a, that projects in the direction of the inside of case 40 continuing from of main shaft part 62a (upper side of Figure 6), and seat part 62c (cont this slide groove 62d, and door lock member 62 is configured such th slide up and down
- Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key par shaft part 62a
- claw accommodating part 60c provided on door mam body accommodating part 60c is configured from a groove that extends prescribed length in the vertical direction Therefore, when door loc slides upward or downward, claw 62e makes contact with the inside claw accommodating part 60c and the sliding of door lock member 62 direction is thus restricted
- the sliding range of door lock member 62 is defined as a result of the length of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating p prescribed dimension
- door lock member 62 slides upward w door main body 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the top edge of t surface of claw accommodating part 60c
- door lock member 62 is in t which it projects upward from the upper end of door main body 60 member 62 slides downward with respect to door main body 60 and cl contact with the bottom edge of the inside wall surface of claw accom 60c
- door lock member 62 is in the position in which it retreats to the main body 60
- the position at which door loc makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw ac part 60c is defined as the "projected position
- the position at w member 62 makes contact with the bottom edge of claw accommodati defined as the ' retreated position
- Coil spring 67 (elastic member) is placed between door lock memb main body 60 Therefore, door lock member 62 is elastically biase always projects upward from door main body 60 - in other words, in t which it is displaced to the projection position main body 60 and key part 62b engages with the top edge of case 40
- lock member fitting part 46 see Figures 2 and 5
- Door lock member 62 is elastical that it always projects from door mam body 60 due to coil spring 67, s inside lock member fitting part 46 but the position of door lock me intermediate position such that it retreats slightly more to the retr side than the projecting side
- Door lock member 62 is always elast against lock member fitting part 46 when it is in the intermediate po lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fitting part 4
- Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular p attached to the top of the outside of door main body 60 in a state fastened to case 40
- Door main body 60 is equipped with accommoda which houses lock release lever 63
- This accommodating part 6Od concave part that is provided on door main body 60 This will be de and when lock release lever 63 changes positions, lock release lever 6 accommodating part 6Od
- Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release le same time, pin support hole 6Oe into which supporting pin 63a is fitt on door mam body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pi 6Oe, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can rotate free rotational center of supporting pin 63a Specifically, lock releas configured such that it can be freely rotated and displaced between a p roughly parallel to the outer surface of door main body 60, a position inclined at approximately 45° (degrees) (state of door 41 on right sid and a position in which it is folded over roughly horizontally (state of t from the right side of Figure 2) by moving the lever In this spe position of lock release lever 63 when it is housed inside accommodati release lever 63 is rotated from the housed position, through the ne and to the folded position, door lock member 62 slides from the proje through the intermediate position, and to the retreated position Put around, when door lock member 62 is in the projected position lock re is placed in
- lock release lever 63 attempts to further rotate door loc through interlocking cam 63b in a direction pressing downward Howe member 62 is always elastically biased upward by coil spring 67, member 62 is not displaced by the action of the weight of lock release l and door lock member 62 is maintained in the intermediate position
- lock release lever 63 when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for examp in which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates an release lever 63 - lock release lever 63 is rotated and displaced to the f
- lock release lever 63 When lock release lever 63 is displaced to the folded position, interloc rotates and changes the position centered on supporting pin 63a and part 62c of door lock member 62 downward
- door lock member 62 is displaced to the retre the lock of door 41 is released, and this door 41 changes from the block almost completely housed inside door mam body 60 Therefore, when cartridge 14, because lock lever 92 is almost completely housed ins unit 60 rotating is possible with rotating shaft part 64 as the center the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so the user can easil cartridge 14
- the two strips 61c that are provided on wall pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing in inside accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation
- Figure 7 is an oblique view showing appearance of a colored ink cartridge 14
- Figure 8 is an exploded obliq colored ink cartridge 14
- Figure 9 is a diagram showing protector 30 top surface view of protector 300 from the perspective of IXa in Figure a cross sectional view of protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figu following description
- the X direction indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir element 100)
- the Y direction height direction of ink cartridge 14 case 200, ink reservoir element orthogonal to the X direction
- the Z direction indicates the w (thickness direction) of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir eleme is orthogonal to the X direction
- Arrow B illustrat is parallel to the X direction, which indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14, and it indicates the direction in which ink cartridge 14 is refill unit 13
- colored ink cartridge 14 is equipped are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal materials, burned at the time of disposal
- resin materials for example, nylon, polyester or poly be used as resin materials
- ink reservoir element 100 is primarily frame part 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores in and reservoir space including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink su which supplies ink stored in this frame part 110 to multifunction Figure l), ambient air intake part 130, which introduces ambient part 110, detection part 140 (irradiated part), which is provided in the amount of remaining ink stored inside frame part 110, ink dispen which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 160, which is welde of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) in order reservoir chamber on frame part 110 Descriptions of frame part 1 part 120 ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink dispen and film 160 and the manufacturing process for ink reservoir eleme given below
- Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwic element 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8.
- Z di case member 210 is a member that covers the bottom side surface o element 100 in Figure 8
- second case element 220 is a member t top side surface of ink reservoir element 100 in Figure 8
- First an members 210 and 220 are made of resin materials and are manuf injection molding
- the depths of first and second case members lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z directio such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such th these depths is roughly equivalent to the thickness of ink reservoir el a result, the distance between ink reservoir element 100 and the ins case 200 becomes small (the gap becomes narrow), so even if pressur 210 is 210b the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wa 210c and the vertical walls that are respectively connected to verti 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe (the right side vertical wall part 21Od, and
- Case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing i 120 and ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 vertical wall part 210b of first case member 210
- Case cutout parts 2 formed into roughly semicircular shapes from the edges of vertical and case cutout part 211 on the right front side of Figure 8 is a cutout to ink supply part 120, while case cutout part 212 on the left back sid a cutout corresponding to ambient air intake part 130 Rectangular c 213 which is cut out into a rectangular shape, is formed between ca
- case projecting parts 214a and 214b which direction of protector 300 (left front direction and X direction in Figu surface on which case cutout parts 211 213 are formed (vertical wall formed on first case member 210
- case projecting part 214a case projecting cutout part 214al, w into a rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms t cutout parts 211 to 213
- Case projecti 214bl which is also cut out into a rectangular shape, is also formed surface that forms the side of case cutout parts 211 to 213
- These c cutout parts 214al and 214bl are provided in order to prevent desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protector 300 is att 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which wil below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9)
- case fitting groove 214b2 which is used as a fitting part i protector fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described be on case projecting part 214b
- This case fitting groove 214b2 is for portion of vertical wall part 21Oe from the edge of case projecting part the protector 300 side)
- rod member 215a which protrudes in the direction o member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on t part 120 side (right front side of Figure 8) and determines the p reservoir element 100 sealed inside case 200
- rod members 21 which protrude in the direction of second case member 220 (Z dir vicinity of vertical wall part 21Oe on the ambient air intake part 130 side of Figure 8) and determine the position of ink reservoir element case 200 are formed on first case member 210
- the position of ink rese 100 is determined by the three locations of these rod members 215a to can prevent the attachment of ink reservoir element 100 in mistaken
- Second case member 220 comprises a plate shaped part that is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall
- Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure th symmetrical to first case member 210
- Case cutout parts 221 to 223 are formed on vertical wall part 220b and 221a connected to case cutout part 221 and contact groove 222a con cutout part 222 are also formed
- Case cutout parts 221 and 222 are fo same shapes as case cutout parts 211 and 212 of first case member semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is formed into the s case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular sh case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of cas
- case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 the direction of case cutout parts 221 to 223 towards the edge from th connects to the outside surface of vertical wall part 21Od of second cas Case projecting cutout part 224al (not illustrated in the figure) is f projecting part 224a, and case projecting cutout part 224b 1 and case 224b2 are formed on case projecting part 224b across a portion of ver 22Oe from the edge of case projecting part 224b
- second case memb hole parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) having holes i members 215a 215c fit after passing through in the direction of first 210 (Z direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod member of first case member 210 are formed
- first case member 210 and second case emb 200 are formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are i which they hold ink reservoir element 100, roughly circular throu expose a portion of ink supply part 120 to the outside are formed b parts 211 and 221, while roughly circular through holes that expos ambient air intake part 130 to the outside are formed by case cutout
- first case member 210 an member 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance, formed such that details such as case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 2 and case cutout parts 211 to 213 and 221 to 223 also have the Therefore, when first case member 210 and second case mem resin molded, their die shapes are similar so costs associated with die reduced
- case 200 On first an members 210 and 220, vertical wall parts 21Od, 21Oe 22Od, and 22Oe of both sides) in directions (Y direction) that are orthogonal to longitud B (X direction connecting the right back side of Figure 8 and the lef Figure 8> arrow B in Figure 8) are formed into concave shapes, and ste
- longitudinal direction B of first an members 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X direction) longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction o element 100, and the longitudinal direction of case 200
- first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second c described First case welded part 226 is connected to case projectin the same plane, and on the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, part 226a, which is formed into a concave shape in the direction o second case member 220, and engagement part 226b that engages member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when ink cartridge 14 is remo unit 13 (see Figure l)
- Concave part 226a is a region for securing range when pullout member 65 rotates
- Case welded part 227 has la which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediat longitudinal direction B of second case member 220 and this latch part that engages with swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) i which it is installed in refill unit 13
- engagement part 216b (not illustrated in t latch part 217a (not illustrated in the figure) which are formed wit same shapes as concave part 226a, engagement part 226b, and latc second case member 220, are also formed on first case member 210
- protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 a is a diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of from the perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross se protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figure 9(a)
- Protector 300 is protecting ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in pa reservoir element 100 when ink cartridge 14 is shipped
- Protector 300 a resin material and is manufactured using injection molding which is fitted into the fitting groove formed by case fitting groov 224b2 (see Figure 8) is formed in the vicinity of the end of the si through hole 310 of protector 300 (left side in Figure 9(a))
- Second pr part 330a which is fitted into the through hole formed by case pro parts 214al and 224al (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 t formed in the vicinity of the end of the opposite side as the side protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in Figure 9(a)) and se fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through
- protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b whi inserted into the through holes formed by case cutout parts 213 an side wall of detection part 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughly positions in longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (Y direction in Fi Protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b are connected to bo formed parallel to longitudinal direction C (top and bottom side walls i and they are formed such that they project upward (X direction on th the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir element 100 Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, maintain the strength of protector 300
- First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends parallel to a direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of (vertical direction in Figure 9(a)> X direction), and consists of protecto
- each protector vertical wall 322 that are connected to the side wall on the opposite side through hole 310 from protector vertical wall 321 (left side in Fi illustrated in Figure 9(b), each protector vertical wall 322 consists formed parallel to protector vertical wall 321 from the top end of part 320 is inserted into the fitting groove, it is inserted as it is rest ends of protector vertical wall 321, which extends in the Z direction longitudinal direction C (Y direction), and the end of protector vertic longitudinal direction C
- first protector fitting part 320 is roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by case fitting and 224b2 (see Figure 8)
- the attachment of protector 300 takes time if protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the the position of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot b
- protector vertical 322 at one surface (flat surface of protector vertical wall 321) and fou of both sides of protector vertical wall 321 and two ends of protecto 322) the installation properties of protector 300 are improved, installation can be prevented
- protruding parts 330al and 330bl, w away from one another are formed on the edges of second protecto 330a and 330b in the direction in which second protector fitting p 330b mutually separate (edges on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and sha and 330b2, which are formed into roughly cylindrical shapes, are direction of the bottom surface of protector 300 from these edges Figure 9(b))
- Shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2 have elasticity because pr formed from a resin material, and protector 300 is attached and remo protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically deformed direction
- black ink cartridge 14 is co that its external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z direct formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z direction) t 300 Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regar member 1210, and descriptions of second case member 220, ink rese 100, and protector 1300 will be omitted here Only the depth of first 1210 (the thickness of vertical directions (length of Z direction) in differs from that of first case member 210, and the rest of its config same, so it detailed description will be omitted here
- first case member 1210 comprises a part that forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b are provided in roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Figure 11) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of this plat Regarding vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe, the vertical wall t protector 1300 side of first case member 1210 is 1210b, the vertica placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b is 1210c, and the vertical respectively connected to vertical wall parts 1210c and 1210b are vert 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121O side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartridge 14 i that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first cas for colored ink and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly inc
- case cutout parts 1211 and 12 formed into roughly semicircular shapes on vertical wall part 1210b, first case member 1210 in order to expose ink supply part 120 an intake part 130 to the outside of case 200, and case cutout part 1213 out into a rectangular shape is formed between case cutout part 1 cutout part 1212
- Two case projecting parts 1214a and 1214b are fo sides of first case member 1210, and case projecting part 1214a has sl 1214a2 Rod members 1215a, 1215b and 1215c, which determine the Because this rib 1218 is provided, the space (gap) formed between element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is therefore possible t strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
- first case member 12 case member 220 in the vertical direction (Z direction) differ, so ink su ambient air supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positione shifted from the center position in the vertical direction (biased positi
- Figure 12 is an oblique view that shows the extern of large capacity black ink cartridge 14
- Figure 13 is an exploded o large capacity black ink cartridge 14
- the external profile of large ink cartridge 14 is configured such that it is larger (longer in the Z d colored and black ink cartridges 14 Specifically, the vertical wall heig wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of second case member 2220 are formed s are roughly twice the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 22 second case member 220, and second case member 2220, which co 2200, is simpl made thicker than second case member 220 for colored thicknesses of first case member 2210 and second case member 2220 direction (Z direction) are roughly equivalent, so ink supply part 212 supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 are positioned in the cen the vertical direction
- refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 is configured equipped with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that hou cartridges 14 and a single accommodating chamber 50 that selectivel ink cartridge 14 and large capacity black ink cartridge 14 (the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large capa cartridge 14)
- the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large capa cartridge 14
- ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference Figure 14 is a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Fi front view of ink reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a bac reservoir element 100
- the state of ink reservoir element 100 illustr 14 is the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunctio Figure 1) As illustrated in Figure 14, this is a position in which th direction (X direction) and the width direction (Z direction) of ink car reservoir element 100) are horizontal directions, and it is a state supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part 140 on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom ambient air intake part 130 is positioned on the ceding side
- Ink rese 2100 differs from ink reservoir element 100 onl with re ard to its thi approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side walls) posi directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface si surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 the pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when
- frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame manufactured by injection molding using a resin material, and it ha because it is formed to be translucent (or transparent) This is becaus below, light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a of remainin sensor 57 positioned on both sides of detection part 140 is trans receiving part 57b in order to detect the amount of remaining ink in element 100
- Outer circumference welded part 400a is a vertical wall th the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of first chamb reservoir chamber 111)
- the blackened edge portions circumference welded parts (ribs or first ribs) 411a to 417a illustra 14(a) are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), surface side edge (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded p welded surface part (fixed part) on the periphery of first opening 112 welded to this welded surface part by ultrasonic welding
- outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b c reservoir chamber 111 in which ink is stored
- the region on the fron illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir cha the region on the back surface side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is se 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111
- outer circumference wel illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first opening 112a of frame part 11 circumference welded part 400b illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second o frame part 110
- Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 42 14(a) and 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 an stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside ambient air co passage forming part 430 (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates wit intake part 130 and introduces ambient air into ink reservoir plate shaped link forming part 440 (see Figures 14(a) and 14(b)), whic roughly the center of frame part 110 (or ink reservoir chamber 111) an vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to the vicinity of ink dispensing dispensing passage forming part 450 (see Figure 14(b)), which comm ink dispensing part 150 and dispenses ink into ink reservoir chamb link forming part 440 partitions first chamber Ilia and second chamb reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one it is a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a virtual lane S (not illustrated in the figure), in which
- thin plate shap parts are formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Fi bottom part of Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top 14(a) and top part of Figure 14(b)), and through holes 460a to 460c, i members 215a to 215c (see Figure 8) of first case member 210 descri inserted, are formed on these protruding parts
- inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a will be d reference to Figure 14(a) Inner circumference welded parts 411a to 4 inner circumference welded part 411a, which is provided on supply part 420, inner circumference welded part 412a, which is provided o communicating passage forming part 430, and inner circumference 413a to 417a, which are provided on link forming part 440 Moreove surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are pos same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circumferenc 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
- Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path 420 and it consists of a downward slo in vertical wall that slo es part 130, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall tha direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame pa vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a direction th orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (vertical direc 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are roughly T-s circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward fac shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal frame part 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame pa downward sloping vertical wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110
- Inner welded part 415a consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitu B of frame part 110, a vertical wall that curves roughly perpendicular faces the direction of the bottom part
- At least a portion of the vertical walls of inner welded parts 411a to 417a extends in a direction that slopes downwar orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (in other wor art side of ink reservoir chamber 111 in the position in which ink c welded part 400a (scattered in multiple units), so they efficientl generation of slack in film 160 and avoid inhibiting the flow of ink
- inner circumference wel to 417b inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumf parts 413b to 417b are formed with roughly the same shapes as inner welded part 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 4 above and in positions corresponding to those of inner circumferenc 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a
- an circumference welded part 412b is formed with a different shape and position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a
- Moreov surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are pos same virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circumf part 400b, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual pla
- Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumf part 412bl which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer welded part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitu B of frame part 110 (Y direction), and inner circumference welded part likewise consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumf part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal frame part 110]
- Inner circumference welded part 412bl and inner welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, which demarcat communicating passage forming part 430 This is because communicating passage forming part 430 is formed only on the front frame part 110, and inner circumference welded part 412b circumference welded part 412b2 are provided in order to suppress the slack in film 160 in the portion corresponding to the back surfac ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 Moreover, as surface side, inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b become even if the case deforms on the side of ink reservoir element 100 As possible
- Figure 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Fi diagram that shows the outline of supply path forming part 420 (d back surface side of frame part 110),
- Figure 15(b) is a diagram cross sectional view of supply path forming part 420 through lin Figure 15 (a)
- Figure 15(c) is a diagram that shows the state in which remaining ink has decreased
- Figure 15(d) is a diagram that sho which the supply of ink has been completed
- supply path forming part 420 equipped with first supply communicating hole 421, which communi supply part 120, supply partition wall 422, which is formed i triangular frame when viewed from the direction perpendicular t Figure 15(a) such that it encloses this first supply communicating h part 427, which covers the region on the inside of supply partition extends parallel to virtual planes R and S between the planes, communicating hole 423, which is formed as a portion of supply partit cut out, supply concave part 424, which is formed by making a portion part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part of Figure 15(a)> portio of part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chambe circumference welded part 400b) into a concave shape (stepped sha 428 which extends from outer circumference welded art 400b and su welded surface part of outer circumference welded part 400b (virtual space enclosed by supply partition wall 422 and plate part 427 chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that is supplied to
- supply partition wall 422 is form when film 160 is to be welded it separates the inside of frame reservoir chamber 111) and first supply communicating hole 421 In ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partition wall 422 c with the inside of frame part 110 only through second supply commu 423
- ink that is stored inside frame part 110 is supplied i chamber 426 from second supply communicating passage 423, a supplied to ink supply part 120 from first supply communicating h illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path)) state illustrated in Figure 15(c)
- ink fills the inside of ink supply ch even if liquid surface I of the ink drops below first supply communic the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 120 through s communicating hole 423
- ink supply part 1 cylindrically shaped, as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as described belo ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed insi element 116, while shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) i
- a difference of distance tl is pro part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber circumference welded part 400b and the lower end of second supply c hole 423
- second su l communicatin hole 423 is above the vicinity of the bottom part of supply concave part 424 (part below communicating hole 423), and the amount of ink that cannot be s markedly reduced
- supply concave part 424 is formed on t part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), so the ink in chamber 111 flows into supply concave part 424 and accumulates in s part 424 when the amount of ink becomes small Therefore, by estab concave part 424, it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink insid chamber 111
- Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave is because the difference of distance t2 is provided between s communicating hole 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply co (side wall on the lower side in Figure 15(d))
- the ink that is between second supply comm 423 and supply concave part 424 remains inside supply concave par being supplied to ink supply part 120
- Dust or plastic debris that is l frame part 110 when ink cartridge 14 is manufactured sometimes r the ink, but the specific gravity of this dust or plastic debris is great the ink so it remains in the vicinity of the bottom part of frame part 1 as illustrated in Figure 15(d)
- debris E remains inside the ink re supply concave part 424
- debris E is supplied to ink supply supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure l)
- there is a possi clogging will occur, making accurate printing impossible
- distance t2 is provided between second supply comm 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply co (side wall on the lower side in Figure 15(
- ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 wil with reference to Figure 16 is a diagram that shows 430 is primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that comm ambient air intake part 130, second ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that comm ink reservoir chamber 111, and ambient air connection passag communicates with first ambient air communicating chamber 43 ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surface film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a contained in virtual plane R)
- the chambers and passage of firs communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicating and ambient air connection passage 433 are formed as film 160 is front side of Figure 16(a)
- First ambient air communicating hole 434 which communicates air intake part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b tha surface 437a of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (secon is the surface of plate part 438 described above)
- second ambient air communicating ho communicates with first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111, the side of first surface 437a
- third ambient air communicating h communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111 second surface 437b (plate part 438)
- First ambient air communicati formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating on the side of ambient air intake part 130 left back side in Fi communicating opening 433b is formed on side wall surface 432a of se air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first ambient air co chamber 431 (left back side in Figure 16)
- one of of ambient air connection passage 433 (side wall on the lower side in F inner circumference welded art 412a are formed) Because a part having a passage that introduces am extremely small cross sectional area (ambient)
- ambient air connection passa downward in the direction of second ambient an- communicating cha first ambient air communicating chamber 431
- ambient passage 433 slopes downward, the device is in the position in which in is installed in refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1, ink that has p ambient air connection passage 433 can be naturally returned to chamber 111 due to gravity
- the cross sectional ar air connection passage 433 is made small, the penetration of ink sto reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection passage 433 ca
- ambient air connection passage 433 is formed as welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces is a side wal deformed by bending
- ambient air connection pa configured such that its cross sectional area changes easily Theref meniscus forms, the meniscus can
- Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air co passage forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading pos 16(b) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such tha connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side (the side of Ilia of frame part 110 is the lower side and first surface 437a is the lo Figure 16(c) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side (the s chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side and second surfac lower side)
- first ambient air communic 431, second ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient passage 433 as described above and establishing the opening po ambient air communicating hole 434 and the opening position of c opening 433b in positions that are symmetrical to ambient air conne 433, it is possible to prevent the leakage of ink from ambient air in Further by making the cross sectional area of ambient air connec small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink and to prevent t into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
- link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Fi forming part 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part dispensing part 150 inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and it is form the center position in ink reservoir chamber 111 Therefore link for connects two locations that oppose frame part 110, so it is also a member that maintains the strength of frame part 110
- Link formi also a divider plate that divides the chamber such that the side of first and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the same region of late that divides first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b of 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this a linking part 441 Further, the upper end of the height direction ( ambient air side linking part 441 communicates with inner circum
- linking communicating holes 443 446 are linking forming part 440
- first chamber Ilia and second chamber communicate in the center region of ink reservoir chamber 111 so slig sometimes arise in the amounts of ink in first chamber Ilia and se 111b
- differences arise in the air pressure inside ink reservoi so the adverse effect that ink cannot be smoothly (or accurately) su
- linking communicating holes 443 446 such th across link forming part 440, it is possible to make the amounts 420 is second reservoir internal opening 114, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b
- Linking rib 418a which connects multiple inner circumference 412a 417a provided on the side of first opening 112a from link forming linking rib 418b which connects inner circumference welded part provided on the side of second opening 112b from link forming part 4 on link forming part 440
- These linking ribs 418a and 418b are not ill figure, but they are formed into thin walled shapes with vertical lower than inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and inner welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these linking ribs 418a formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result, linking ribs connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to 4 are formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintai of link forming part 440 Moreover, linking ribs 418a and 418b ar thin walled shapes, and they are formed with vertical walls that a inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and 4
- FIG. 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage for Figure 17(a) is a diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passag 450
- Figure 17(b) is a cross sectional view of dispensing passage 450 through line XVIIb XVIIb in Figure 17(a)
- dispensing passage 450 in the position in which ink is dispensed, it is in the highest reservoir chamber 111, roughly U shaped dispensing partition wall provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film and partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect t chamber 111, and second dispensing communicating hole 454, wh opening part of dispensing partition wall 453
- the opened part cylinder part 451 is opening 451a, which is formed on the outside frame part 110, and the surface that opposes this opening 451a is bot of dispensing cylinder part 451 The region demarcated by dispensing 451
- Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference which film 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 45 dispensing communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in whi welded As with the welded end part of the other inner circumference 411b to 417b, the welded end part of dispensing partition wall 453 is the same virtual plane as the welded end part of outer circumferenc 400b
- ink is dispensed in a state in which seco communicating hole 454 is positioned on top and first dispensing c hole 452 is positioned on bottom (position in which the Y direction is direction in Figure 17(a)) Moreover, ink sequentially passes throu cylinder part 451, first dispensing communicating hole 452, dispen wall flow path 453a and second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state illustra 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly from fi communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 45 ink is dis ensed smoothl without resistance
- the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber is dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, decompression process in which the pressure is reduced by aspiratin air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 from dispensing passage formi sometimes performed This is performed in order to reduce the amou air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to
- FIG. 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinit part 140
- Figure 18(a) is a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinit through which sensor arm 470 can be displaced
- Enclosure part 141 is roughly box shaped passage by a bottom surface, which is formed b 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lower side in Figure 18(a)), a pair of which are formed by both side walls 141b that are provided on bo bottom wall 141a an inner side surface, which is formed by inner that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side wal ceiling surface which is formed ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to th both side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and opposite bottom wall 141a
- Detection part 140 is also equipped with a part 142, which is provided such that it projects upward from the b formed by bottom wall 141a and supports sensor arm 470 from belo wall 143, which is provided from the inside wall of frame pa
- first gap t3 between the i enclosure 141 (pair of wall surfaces, inside surfaces of both side walls outside of sensor arm 470
- first gap t3 between the i enclosure 141
- the ink in part 140 is depleted, but because first gap t3 between sensor arm 470 141 is minute, ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the surf the ink, and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due t tension of the ink
- first gap t3 is provide spacing is that, when this spacing is made wide, the spacing between part 57a and Jight receiving part 57b also widens and the detection remaining ink detection sensor 57 thus deteriorates Therefore by supporting part 142 such that first gap
- bottom wall 141a on the lower par art 141 slopes downward in the dir junction part of enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 be and this forms a shape that is conducive to guiding ink to the side o chamber 111 (or supply path forming part 420)
- the j enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 forms a fluid guidin for guiding the ink
- vertical wall 143 that connects to a part 141 is formed on sloping surface 143a, which slopes downward i of supply path forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Slopin constitutes a portion of the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer welded part 400b)
- vertical wall 143 slopes downward in the direction of forming part 420, and the junction part with the inside wall of fra formed into a roughly right angle so ink can be efficiently guided in t supply path forming part 420 by this slope and the capillary force I the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame pa fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink Because the thick supporting part 142 and vertical wall 143 are formed such that the equivalent, vertical wall 143 is formed
- sensor arm 470 In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor ar contact with the ceding surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which o wall 141a of detection part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is t It is therefore possible to prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of arm 470 is manufactured by injection molding using a resin material (for example), and it has light blocking properties because it is formed
- Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to remaining ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion i remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) which detects t remaining ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111
- Sensor arm 4 equipped with balance part 471, which is formed from a material specific gravity than that of the ink, attachment part 472 which frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 473, which ext attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to bal (upward in Figure 19(a)), further extends sloping upward, and block possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57
- Attachment linking part that connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
- Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a which is atta sandwiching part 425 (see Figure 14) of frame part 110 is formed o part 472 This .attachment shaft 472a is formed with a diameter that i the inside diameter of arm sandwiching part 425 and is larger than th opening of arm sandwiching part 425 As a result, when sensor arm it can be operated with little resistance, and the deviation of sensor arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
- Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473a, which extends that is roughly perpendicular to balance part 471 (upward in Figure arm part 473b, which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473a, arm part 473c, which is used as a light blocking part that blocks possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57
- arm part 473 is formed su substantially thinner than balance part 471 and attachment part because, when arm art 473 is formed with a thick profile, the scal formed with a thin profile in order to prevent increases in the scale o 14 and to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Ribs 473d vertical arm part 473a and sloping arm part 473b, and the strength by these ribs
- ar parts 473el and 473e2 are formed into semispherical shapes, the o makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 is the protruding parts 473el and 473e2, so the effects of the surface tension reduced
- Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravit than that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step in the amount of remaining ink, balance part 471 moves in the di bottom part of frame part 110 (direction of the bottom part of ink rese 111, downward in Figures 14(a) and 14(b)) in step with this drop surface I of the ink
- balance part 471 moves in the direction part, and arm part 473 moves in the direction of the top part using att 472 as a rotational axis, shielding arm part 473c deviates from the ra detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 and thereby the state i depleted can be detected
- ink supply part 12 intake part 130, and detection part 140 are provided on one of the s frame part 110 (one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed)
- s frame part 110 one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed
- ink c installed inside accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 s Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply sequentially aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom o In other words, the elements are aligned in the height direction (Y di cartridge 14
- width t5 of detection part 140 is for it is shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (o supply cap 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustr 20(b), detection part 140 is formed such that it is concave in the dire part 110 (in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir cha respect to ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
- arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned o detection part 140
- the light path of r detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) is opened from the light blocking st rotation of arm part 473, and the amount of remaining ink can be result
- light receiving part emitting part 57a are positioned on both sides of detection part 140 right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side surfaces of detection part 14 the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and back side surfaces i form detection surfaces 140a and 140b
- t surfaces 140a and 140b are arallel to the hei ht direction (Y dir from ink supply part 120 at this time and adheres to detection pat 1 when ink cartridge 144 is temporarily removed from refill unit 13, in to needle 49 of multifunction device 1 is likely to adhere to the opening of ink supply part 120, but after it is removed, the ink that vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 120 sometimes adheres to 140 depending on the position in which
- detection part 1 in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with supply part 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adher part 140 even if ink drips from ink supply part 120
- ink cartridge 14 in a position in which ink supply part 120 detection part 140 and the end surface of ink supply part 120 (end sur opening 600a of supply cap 600 is formed) is vertical, ink that has a vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 120 is most susceptible to gravity and likely to drop but because detection part 140 is withdraw ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink supply part 120, the i does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adhere to 140
- side walls that form detect and 140b from the side surface of frame part 110 are formed on dete Therefore edge part 140c where the side surface of frame part 110 surfaces 140a and 140b intersect is formed at a roughly perpendicula ink adheres to the vicinity of edge 140c, the
- ink reservoir element 100 is primaril into four elements
- the four parts are frame part 110, ink supply m which constitutes ink supply part 120 ambient air intake mechanis constitutes ambient air intake part 130, and ink dispensing plug pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150 (s Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of an elastic member such as Pul once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451, it cannot be easily even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is configured such that t needle is blocked
- Ink supply element 116 which is formed in a roughly cylindric which a portion of ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted, and ambi element 117 which is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape in whic ambient air intake mechanism 510 is inserted, are formed as a unit 110 Further, protruding parts 116a and 116b (protruding part illustrated in the figure), which protrude in the direction of the outer of ink supply element 116 in order to fasten ink supply mecha symmetrically arranged on ink supply element 116 centered on the Figure 21) Protruding parts 116a 116b, 117a, and 117b are formed end surface on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 protrudes in a di perpendicular to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply elem outer circumferential surface of ambient air intake element 117 (Z they slope from this protruding edge part towards the outer circumfe of ink supply element 116 or the outer circumference part of ambi element 117 In other words, when ink supply
- ink supply mechanism 500 is e supply cap 600, which is installed on ink supply element 116, sup which is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber into which Figure 2) of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is inserted, sup which blocks the flow path of ink when this supply joint 610 and th make contact, first supply spring 630 which is housed inside this su and is made of a resinous elastic material, supply slider 640, which co surface of supply valve 620 and can be operated in a uniaxial directio movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into needle 4 arrow Ol in Figure 22(a) hereafter called the axial direction Ol mechanism 500”» regarding this direction as is clear from Figure 1 mechanism 50 becomes parallel to the X direction when ink cartridge second supply spring 650, which is housed inside this supply slid with ambient air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intake ambient air joint 710, which is made of an elastic resin material s ambient air valve 720, which blocks the flow path of ink when this am
- Figure 23 is a diagram that shows supply cap 600
- Figure 23(a) that shows a side view of supply cap 600
- Figure 23(b) is a diagram side view of supply cap 600 from the perspective of arrow XXIIIb
- Figure 23(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply cap 600, Fi dia ram that shows a bottom view of su l ca 600, and Fi u dripping to the outside of ink cartridge 14
- Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engageme which are formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to t vicinity of the top (vicinity of the upper side end in Figure 23(a)) an protruding parts 116a and 116b (see Figure 21) of ink supply elem supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21), supply securing part 601
- a pair of supply cap cutout parts 6 (see Figure 23(c) for supply cap cutout part 604b) which are formed line that is roughly orthogonal to the straight line that connects eng 603a and 603b (positions moved approximately 90° with respect to a of ink supply mechanism 500) and are cut out facing the direction part 602 from the top surface of supply securing part 601 (upper e Figure 23(b)), are formed on supply securing part 601
- the region from the circle that fo hole 605 to the circle one step outward is first upper wall 606a, wh upper end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region from the circ side that forms first upper wall 606a to the circle one step outward i 606b which forms a sloping surface that slopes downward in the di bottom surface of ink storage part 602
- the region from the circle of that forms this sloping wall 606b to the circle one step outward is lo which forms the lower end surface of ink storage part 602, and the re circle of the outer side that forms lower wall 606c to the circle one st second upper wall 606d, which forms the lower end surface of supply
- the part needle 49 is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross se Figure 23(e) such that it decreases in diameter towards insertion h maximum diameter of that of opening 600a, which forms the final exit a result, the inner circumferential surface on the side of axial center wall 606b becomes the insertion path into which needle 49 (see Figure The space of range t7 illustrated in Figures 23(c) and 23(c) (in oth space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wall 606c, and outer circu 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which ink can be stored (accumul
- supply cap 600 When supply cap 600 is attached to ink supply element 116 (s protruding parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 protrud circumferential direction, so supply cap 600 is attached as it increas m the outer circumferential direction Because supply cap cutout p 604b are formed, the diameter of supply cap 600 increases in the dire engagement parts 603a and 603b move away from one another Th supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attached without ap pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency w damage to supply cap 600
- Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610
- Figure 24(a) that shows a side view of supply joint 610
- Figure 24(b) is a diagram plan view of supply joint 610
- Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a supply joint 610
- Figure 24(d) is a cross sectional view of sup through line XXIVd XXIVd in Figure 24(b)
- supply joint 610 is formed in three side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular t Figure 24(a))
- the part illustrated in the bottommost step (lower s 24(a)) is joint outer circumference part 611, which is the part that with second upper wall 606d of ink storage part 602 of supply cap 6 23) and the inner circumferential surface of supply securing part 601 joint inner circumference part 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a)
- Fu illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 612 is joints 613, which makes contact with supply valve 620 (see Figure 25) Sup made of an elastic material such as a resin rubber
- joint contact part 613 projects fro 612a of joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that with supply valve 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it n tip 613a (upper end part in Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes co bottom surface of supply valve 620 and blocks the flow path of the ink protruding part 614, which protrudes from the inner circumferential s axial center 01, opening 612c, which forms the insertion opening of Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumfer (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insertion passage 612d, w between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, are formed circumference part 612
- the portio passage 612d that is ⁇ formed in a stepped shape is formed with roug spacing from axial center Ol in the outer circumferential dir circumferential surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 is provided direction of axial center
- ink flow path 615 which passes bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613a o part 613 (from the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)), is for oint 610
- This ink flow ath 615 consists of o ening 612c, which
- the lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a steppe direction of axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path in a tapered shape towards protruding part flow path 615b
- path 615a is formed in a stepped shape such that the diameter gradu from opening 612c towards the contact surface with inner circumfer 614a of joint protruding part 614
- the lower part of step part flow formed in a stepped shape, so even if needle 49 (see Figure 2) is r minute quantity of ink flows through ink flow path 615, the ink i capillary force due to the angular part of this step part so it is possi ink from
- Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smalle ink flow path ,615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindric inside diameter of this protruding part flow path 615b is formed s slightly smaller than the diameter of needle 49 (see Figure 2)
- Con path 615c is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape havi diameter that is larger than that of protruding part flow path 615b, a diameter is sufficiently larger than the diameter of needle 49
- Bec surface 614b is formed on the border of protruding part flow path 615 part flow path 615c, the inside diameter in the direction of axial ce protruding part flow path 615b to contact part flow path 615c drasti
- joint contact part 613 assum that is cut out into a countersunk shape by its inner circumferential and stepped surface 614b, and tip 613a of joint contact part 613 is pos periphery of this cutout part protruding part 614 acts to seal the
- Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620
- Figure 25(a) that shows a side view of supply valve 620
- Figure 25(b) is a diagram side view of supply valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb in
- Figure 25(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply valve 620, a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply valve 620, and Fig cross sectional view of supply valve 620 through line XXVe XXVe in Fi
- supply valve 620 is equipped with wall 621 which forms the bottom surface of supply valve 620 (lower s Figure 25(a)) and valve outer circumferential wall 622, which is provi direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure valve bottom wall 621
- valve constraining parts 625 which project i direction as valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of suppl connected to valve outer circumferential wall 622
- Each of the valv parts 625 is equipped with valve hook part 626, which projects towar Ol from its tip (tip of the upper side portion in Figure 25(a)) and supply slider 640
- valve protruding parts 622a which protrude i shapes in the outer circumferential direction and are formed from bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622, are formed on circumferential wall 622 with equal spacing along valve outer circu 622
- These valve protruding parts 622a are provided in order to smo the operations of supply valve 620 when supply valve 620 is inserted i element 116 (see Figure 21)
- valve protruding parts 62 semicircular shapes are provided, only valve protruding parts 622a with the inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and of supply valve 620 inside ink supply element 116 become smooth
- Valve constraining parts 625 and valve projecting wall are for they extend upward from valve outer circumferential wall 622 As misalignment of supply slider 640 in the direction orthogonal to th axial center Ol can be prevented Further, the operation of supply sli direction of axial center Ol is restricted by valve constraining par supply spring 630 can be reliably housed and operated As illustrat 25(c) four ink flow paths 627, which communicate in the vertical dir arranged in parallel on valve bottom wall 621 As illustrated in Fig height of valve bearing part 628 in the direction of axial center Ol i that it is substantially lower than valve outer circumferential w bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sprin make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 6 in the space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is be supply spring 630 makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the in blocked and ink no longer flows Therefore, valve bearing part 628 order to secure the ink flow path, and the part is acceptable as long spring 630 does not make contact with valve bottom
- Valve inner circumferential wall 629 which is formed in a roughl that covers the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 spring 630, is provided on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and o ink flow path 627
- This valve inner circumferential wall 629 is provid restrict the movement of first supply spring 630 in a direction that is axial center 01, and first supply spring 630 is accurately bent in th axial center Ol by restricting the movement of first supply spring 630 that is orthogonal to axial center Ol
- Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply spring 630 Fig diagram that shows a side view of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(b that shows a plan view of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(c) is a shows a bottom view of first supply spring 630, and Figure 26(d) is a c view of first supply spring 630 through line XXVId XXVTd in Figure 2
- First supply spring 630 is formed in a roughly reversed bowl shape hollow cone), and it is primarily equipped with ring shaped spring bot which forms the bottom surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the biased direction of first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 6 part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of supply v Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 i of supply joint 610 (see Figure 24)
- the diameter of spring bottom part such that it is larger than the diameter of spring top part 632, so spri
- ink flow path 634 which communi tip of spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bot spring bottom part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed o spring 630
- This ink flow path 634 consists of top part flow path 6 demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spring top part 63 flow path 634b, which is demarcated by the inner circumferential su plastic part 633 and bottom part flow path 634c, which is demarcate circumferential surface of spring bottom part 631
- spring plastic part 633 is formed in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction to the page
- spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed i reversed bowl shape that is convex on the side moving away from ax spring plastic part 633 can be more easily deformed than in the case i plastic part 633 is a roughly conic shape
- top part flow path 634a of spring top also be formed into a roughly quadrilateral shape
- the effects contained in the ink can be reduced
- the air bubbles contained spherical so when the flow path is blocked by air bubbles that grow l inside diameter of top part flow path 634a, the ink flow path ( assa e) quadrilateral, and it may alternatively be formed into a polygo hexahedron or a star shape As in this embodiment even if it is circu formed with a diameter with which the effects of air bubbles would be
- spring top part 632 is formed int thick cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center formed such that the cross sectional shape perpendicular to the dire center Ol (biased direction of first supply spring 630) is uniform
- Si bottom part 631 is also formed into a relatively thick cylindrical shap in the direction of axial center 01, and it is formed such that the c shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center 01 is uniform
- spring plastic part 633 is formed i reversed bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or prescribed angle in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, the respect to loading in the direction of axial center Ol become weak in spring bottom part 631 and spring top part 632 Furthermore, sprin 633 is formed such that it has a thinner profile than spring bottom spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength Accordingly, whe spring 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically deforms
- Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that spring 630, and the composition of second supply spring 650 cons bottom part 651, spring top part 652, spring plastic part 653, and ink (top part flow path 654a, plastic part flow path 654b, and bottom p 654c) Further, first ambient air spring 730 and second supply sprin formed with the same shape as that of first supply spring 630, and the consist of spring bottom parts 731 and 751, spring top parts 732 an plastic parts 733 and 753, ink flow paths 734 and 754 (top part flow p 754a, plastic part flow paths 734b and 754b, and bottom part flow p 754c)
- Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a hig hardness than first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second supp and it is primarily equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 64 the outer periphery of supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting w 642b, which project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 in of axial center
- slider 643 which extend from slider outer circumferential wall 641 to th slider projecting wall 642a (upper side end in Figure 27(a)) and are lo into valve guide grooves 623 of supply valve 620 (see Figure 25), slider
- first and second supply springs 630 and 650 which is formed on the inside of slider outer circumferential wall 6 contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and second sp 650, and slider through hole 645, which is formed in the center pos platform part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform clear from Figure 27(c)
- slider projecting walls 642a and 642b a [symmetrically] such that they sandwich axial center 01
- the pair insertion parts 643 is also positioned [symmetrically] such that they s center Ol
- the inside diameter of slider outer circumferential wall 641 is for it is roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 6 first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting w 642b are formed such that they project from this slider outer circum 641 in the direction of axial center 01, so when first and second suppl and 650 are arranged, the movement of first and second springs 630 a direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted As a result fir springs 630 and 650 are elastically deformed in the direction of axial c
- Slider loose insertion parts 643 are formed such that they e direction of axial center Ol of supply slider 640 (formed across seat 660, and Figure 28(d) is a cross sectional view of valve seat 66 XXVIIId XXVIIId in Figure 28(b)
- valve seat 660 is equipped with val part 661, which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and with spring top part 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat 662, which are placed on the top surface of this valve seat bottom p side in Figure 28(a))
- Each valve seat bearing part 662 is equipped sloping surface 662a, which slopes downward as it approaches the c seat 660, and check valve 670, which will be described below is re valve seat sloping surface 662a
- valve seat bearing parts 662 ar prescribed spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 66 seat through holes 662b, which pass through the front and back of v are formed on three of the six valve seat bearing parts
- These fi through holes 662b are formed on a portion other than valve seat s 662a of valve ,seat bearing part 662 (horizontal portion of valve sea 662) Therefore, because first valve seat through holes 662b are forme that differs from the portion that receives check valve 670, the block flow path can be prevented
- second valve seat through holes 663 which pass thro bottom part 661 are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of v Six of these second valve seat through holes 663 are formed symmetry based on the center line (center line Q illustrated in Fi passes through axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 28(b)
- This second valve seat through holes 663 form an i through which ink flows
- concave valve seat communicatin which connect each of the second valve seat throu h holes 663 are projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumfer of spring top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
- valve surface 662a of valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat 663 in the direction of axial center Ol
- the flow path of the i even if check supported on valve seat sloping surface 662a, the flow path of the i Moreover even if the end surface of spring top part 632 of second sup makes contact with the bottom surfaces of second valve seat thro second valve seat through holes 663 are positioned to the outside circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fi the flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating groo seat communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat 663, so even if there are second valve seat through holes 663 that a valve seat projecting part 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secur
- Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670
- Figure 29(a) is a shows a side view of check valve 670
- Figure 29(b) is a diagram that view of check valve 670
- Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom valve 670
- Figure 29(c) is a cross sectional view of check valve 67 XXIXd XXIXd in Figure 29(a)
- Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape fro perspective (perspective in the direction perpendicular to the page in and it consists of umbrella part 671 and shaft part 672 Umbrella p the flow path of the ink by making contact with cover 680 (see Figur illustrated in Figures 29(b) and 29(d), it is equipped with linking part connected to shaft part 672, and wing part 671b, which extends roug in the outer circumferential direction from this linking part 671a and i a thin profile As a result, when it makes contact with cover 680, wi path of the ink is blocked in the state in which umbrella part 671 of c makes contact with cover 680
- Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover throug Figure 30) of cover 680, which will be described below
- This sha positioned in the vicinity of cover 680 in the state in which it is att 680, and it has ball part 672a which is formed into a roughly spheric ball part 672a is formed with a diameter that is greater than that o through hole 684 of cover 680, and it prevents check valve 670 from f it is attached to cover 680
- Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680
- Figure 30(a) is a shows a side view of cover 680
- Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows cover 680
- Figure 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of c
- Figure 30(d) is a cross sectional view of cover 680 through line X Figure 3 ⁇ (b)
- Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the b side (side of valve seat 660 (see Figure 28)) is opened
- Cover 680 is cover outer circumferential wall 681 which forms the outer periphery, part 682, which forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Fig it is formed such that the bottom surface side is opened
- Valve seat 66 the opening of the bottom surface of cover 680 (lower side in Figu check valve 670 is housed between valve seat 660 and cover 680 In ot space that houses check valve 670 is formed by cover 680 and valve se
- first cover through ho pass through the front and back of cover 680, are formed in the ci direction with respect to axial center Ol
- umbrella part 671 of check va contact with cover top part 682 the entire first cover through hole is ink flow path of second cover through hole 684 formed in t simultaneously blocked
- Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 3l(b) that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700 from the perspective o in Figure 3l(a), Figure 3l(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of a 700, Figure 3l(d) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient ai Figure 3l(e) is a cross sectional view of ambient air cap 700 XXXIe XXXIe in Figure 3l(c)
- ambient air cap 700 is equipped cylindrical ambient air securing part 701, which forms the side wall o air cap 700 and is fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see F ambient air cap bottom wall 702, which forms the bottom wall of a 700 Engagement holes 703a and 703b (see Figure 3l(b) for engageme which are formed from the bottom part of ambient air securing part 7 in Figure 3l(a)) to the vicinity of the top part (vicinity of the end of the Figure 3l(a)) and are engaged with protruding parts 117a and 117b intake element 117 described above when ambient air cap 700 i ambient air intake element 117, are formed on ambient air securing p
- ambient air cap cutout parts 7 (ambient air cap cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), whi in positions moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center positions in which engagement holes 703a and 703b are formed and ar the top end of ambient air securing part 701 to the vicinity of the bo formed on ambient air securing part 701
- ambient air cap 700 When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake protruding parts 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 p outer circumferential direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circumferent Therefore when ambient air cap 700 is to be attached it can be att applying strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installat while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
- Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b) that shows a plan view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a shows a bottom view of ambient air joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a c view of ambient air joint 710 through line XXXIId XXXIId in Figure 3
- ambient air joint 710 is formed in f a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular t Figure 32 (a))
- the part illustrated in the second step from the bottom Figure 32(a)) is joint outer circumference part 711, which is the pa contact with the inner circumferential surface of ambient air securing Figure 31) of ambient air cap 700 and ambient air cap bottom wall 7 the outer circumference part of ambient air joint 710
- the part illustra step of this joint outer circumference part 711 is joint inner circumfer which is provided on the inside of ambient air intake element 117 (s and forms the inner circumference part of ambient air joint 710, and t joint inner circumference part 712 is illustrated in Figure 32(a)
- Fur illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 712 is con which makes contact with ambient air valve 720
- the part illus bottommost step is joint skirt part 714 formed with a thin profil member that covers the outside surface of valve open part 721a (see ambient air valve 720 and exposes it to the outside from ambient air
- joint contact part 713 projects fro 712a of joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that with ambient air valve 720) Joint contact part 713 is formed such t toward tip 713a (upper end part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720 and blocks the ambi path Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint passage 715, whic the bottom surface of joint inner circumference part 712 to tip 713a o part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32(d)), is formed on am 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 is inserted passage 715
- FIG 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air valve 720, and Fig diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient air valve 720
- Ambient has a configuration in which valve open part 721a, which projects fr surface of valve bottom wall 721 and opens the ambient air intake p contact with the side of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is ad valve 620 Therefore, detailed descriptions of valve bottom wall 72 circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 722a, valve guide gro projecting wall 724 valve constraining part 725, valve hook part 72 intake path 727 (part corresponding to ink flow path 627), valve bea and valve inner circumferential wall 729 will be omitted here Illustr that cannot be visually confirmed in the side view ( Figure 33(a)) an ( Figure 33(b)) of ambient air valve 720 will also be omitted here
- Ambient air valve 720 is equipped with valve open part 721a, from the bottom surface of valve bottom wall 721 Valve open part 721 on axial center 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 and is rough a rod shape Roughly semicircular convex part 721b, which projects fr (tip 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an amb path
- ink cartridge 14 When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and 721a operates joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also mak the end surface of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, communication between the ambient air intake path and the outsi part 714 As a result, ambient air that is introduced from the side o device 1 can be introduced smoothly Moreover even if joint elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and makes contact with 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex part 721 part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake p blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservo (see Figure 14)
- ink supply mechanism 500 is ins attached to inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply ele ambient air intake mechanism 510 is inserted into and atta circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake element 117
- ink supply mechanism 500 which is attached to ink suppl will be described On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink suppl projecting wall 801, which projects in the direction of the i circumferential wall 800 is formed on the side of first supply comm this valve seat 660 (left side in Figure 34), and supply slider 640 is that it houses this second supply spring 650 First supply spring 63 supply slider 640 on the opposite side of second supply spring 650, a spring 630 is arranged between supply slider 640 and supply valve supply joint 610 is arranged such that it makes contact with the bot supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to the outside element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th 610 Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts of ink supply element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supp 500 is determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial ce supply mechanism 500 is determined by supply cap 600 and stepped s inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116
- the inside diameter of inner circumferential surface 800 of ink s 116 is formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diam valve 620, and it is configured such that the operation of supply va direction of axial center Ol can be performed smoothly inside ink s 116
- four valve protruding parts 622a are forme circumferential surface of supply valve 620, and it is configured contact surface with inner circumferential surface 800 is small
- the supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal direction with respect to a and makes contact with inner circumferential surface 800, it is possi the state in which supply valve 620 cannot be operated
- a between supply valve 620 and inner circumferential surface 800, so an that passes through the inside of ink supply mechanism 500 and an that flows through the outside of supply valve 620 are formed
- a circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116 is the space t ink flow path chamber
- slider latform art 644 is in a state i position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
- ambient air intake mechanism 510 which is attached t intake element 117 will be described On inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, protruding part 811 which pro direction of ambient air intake mechanism 510 (left direction in formed on the end surface of ambient air intake passage forming pa side of first ambient air communicating chamber
- This protrudin configured as a pair of plate shaped member and it makes contact surface of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750
- a ambient air intake path is formed between protruding part 811 and s 752 of second ambient air spring 750
- the position of ambi mechanism 510 on the side of first ambient air communicating determined as a result of second ambient air spring 750 making protruding part 811
- ambient air slider 74 on ambient air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second ambi 750
- first ambient air spring 730 is housed by ambient air slid opposite side of second ambient air spring 750
- first ambient air arranged between ambient air slider 740 and ambient air valve 7 ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that it makes contact wit surface of ambient air valve 720
- ambient air cap 700 is fastened of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the b on the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this am 710
- Ambient air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding p 117b of ambient air intake element 117, so the position on the outside intake mechanism 510 is determined Therefore, the position of th axial center 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 is determined b cap 700 and protruding part 811 of inner circumferential surface 810 reference to Figures 35 through 39
- Figure 35 is a diagram that manufacturing process before film 160 is welded
- Figure 36 is a explains the welding process of film
- ink cartridge 1 470 is first attached to frame part 110
- Frame part 110 and sensor ar molded using injection molding in a preliminary process (molding pro words, each is respectively molded in a first molding process (prepar in which frame part 110 is injection molded and in a second mo (preparatory process) in which sensor arm 470 is injection molded
- attachment shaft 472a which is provided on att 472 of sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which the vicinity of supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (se attachment process * preparatory process) Arm sandwiching part 425 sandwiching part 425, the vertical and horizontal range of moveme arm part 473c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141d of enclosur detection part 140
- sensor arm 470 cannot be easily detached, so it is possible manufacturing process of ink cartridge 14 from becoming compl prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from detection part 140 cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge 14 is multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably det reliability of the product can be improved
- a supporting part that forms the axis operation of sensor arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (att 472a) of sensor arm 470 is supported on arm sandwiching part 425 110, but a configuration in which an attachment shaft is provided frame part 110 and a sandwiching part is provided on the side of se may also be used, and a configuration in which sensor arm 470 and f are attached using a hinge junction would also be acceptable In ot long as sensor arm 470 is attached such that it can rotate with respect 110, its attachment structure may take any form
- film 160 is cut such that it is la external outline of frame part 110, and it covers frame part 110 At t 160 is arranged on first opening 112a and second opening 112b witho aspirating film 160 with an aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) fr frame part 110 Ultrasound welded surface 900 of an ultrasonic weldi illustrated in the figure) is then placed on film 160 such that it co circumference parts of first and second openings 112a and circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of film 160, a welded to frame part 110
- FIG 37(a) outer circumference welded parts 400a inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b
- ultrasound welded surface 900 of the ultrasonic wel configured such that it covers all of the welded parts (outer circumf parts and inner circumference welded parts), so it is possible to redu.c the manufacturing cost of the welding process of film 160
- film 160 is made of a double layered film comprising a a polyethylene film (called “nylon polyethylene” hereafter) and the si contact with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film later
- nylon completely blocks liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a sm gas circulation is possible between ink reservoir chamber 111 whi sealed by film 160, and packaging bag 930 (see Figure 39(b)), film are formed into two layers or a film formed by mixing nylon an or nylon and polypropylene could be used
- Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is ma type of substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 160 and frame part 110 are formed from the same material both fil welded parts can be fused and welded reliably at the time of ultraso this embodiment
- film 160 has a double layer structure Nylon films polyethylene films from the perspective of strength, but their melting so they are deficient from the perspective of welding operationally
- T film 160 is formed with a double layer structure made of nylon and the strength is secured, and by using the polyethylene layer as the welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low heating so welding operationally is secured
- the nylon layer do the welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of vicinity of the welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity parts can also be maintained
- the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air i 117 is performed in a process in which a compo ambient air joint 710 ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a u air cap 700 is inserted inside inner circumferential surface 810 o intake element 117, and ambient air cap 700 is fixed to the outer ci surface of ambient air intake element 117 At this time, ambient pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117, and engageme and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding parts of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710 circumference part 712 is pressed inside inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, and joint outer circumference sandwiched between ambient air intake element 117 and ambient When the attachment of ambient air cap 700 to ambient air intake e complete the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 is ambient air intake part 130 is completed
- Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir c decompressed by pressure reducing device 910 so even after the dispe the air pressure to a level within the prescribed range (in order to co air pressure is withm the prescribed range)
- the subsequent process that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be d subsequent decompression process is performed using ink dispensin which was inserted into ink dispensing plug 520
- a that supplies ink (not illustrated in the figure) and a pressure reduci reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambient air inside frame illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing needle 920, ink is completely dispensed the flow path is switched and decompr pressure reducing device is begun
- the air pressure p3 third pressu reservoir chamber 111 after subsequent decompression is performed the air pressure pi inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the ink Therefore, the quantity of gas inside ink reservoir chamber 111 furthe a result of the subsequent decompression process, so the generation inside the ink can be prevented, and the deterioration of printing qua bubbles can be avoided
- the ink that flows in at the ti dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink reservoir so air bubbles are more likely
- dispensing passage forming part 45 of second dispensing communicating hole 454 is positioned above liqu the ink (top of Figure 17(a)) so even if subsequent decompression is p a ressure reducin device the ink is never as irated to the outsid pressed to bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451, fir communicating hole 452 is blocked by the outer circumferential s dispensing plug 520, so even if the dispensing needle is mistakenly again, the ink is not dispensed In other words, in the manufacturing cartridge 14, it is possible to prevent the dispensing process from bei twice and to prevent the occurrence of defective products
- rod members 215a to 2 member 210 are inserted mto three through holes 460a to 460c (see Figure 14 f 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumference part of frame p reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member 210
- 120 supply cap 600
- ambient air intake part 130 ambient air cap 700
- Second case member 220 is then attached such that case fitting hol 225c (not illustrated in the figure) of second case member 220 engage with rod to 215c of first case member 210
- ink supply part 120 supplied ambient air intake part 130 (ambient air cap 700) are respectively engaged parts 221 and 222 of second case member 220, and the outer wall of ink supply circumferential surface of supply
- first and second case member as the parts are welded such that case 200 does not peel during trans does not easily peel due to human actions
- any welding range or w may be used
- first and second case members 210 and 220 after the ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first an members 210 and 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultraso absorbed by the ink Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations welded parts of frame part 110 or film 160 are damaged or film 160 pe of vibration accompanying the welding of case 200 Moreover, whe parts of first and second case members 210 and 220 are partiall generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is reduced, so the d part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced
- case projecting parts 214a an projecting part 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecti and 224b (case projecting part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) pr from ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
- cartridge 14 is to be installed in lnkjet recording device 1, even if ink c dropped, case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b make im ground, so the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake be prevented Further, the opening of the ambient air intake path or t path can also be prevented, so the leakage of ink can be prevented
- film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plasticall the side of packaging bag 930 (side of case 200) If the air pressure ins bag 930 is higher than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber sometimes hardens and loses flexibility, , or is damaged in the state inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed when ink cartr without being used for a long period of time When film 160 loses shape of ink reservoir chamber 111 do not change, and the air pres nonuniform, so ink cannot be accurately supplied Moreover, whe damaged, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows to the cartridge 14 However, in this embodiment, the inside of packagi decom ressed such that the air ressure is lower than the air ress chamber 111 (there is a slight amount of gas that remains due to t decompression process implemented previously) can be gradually mov reservoir chamber 111 This is because as described above, film 160 i nylon
- ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging decompressed in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 2 makes direct contact with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink suppl packaging bag 930 deforms due to decompression Valve open part 72 the outside of ambient air intake part 130, so if packaging bag 930 contact with valve open part 721a, valve open part 721a operates an air intake path is sometimes opened If the ambient air intake path ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out Moreover, ambient a 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with the packaging bag 930 However, in this embodiment, protector 300 is at 200, so the damage of ambient air intake part 130 and ink supply p prevented and the opening of the ambient air intake path can be prev
- ink cartridge 14 is manufactured in a process 200 is welded over ink reservoir element 100 after ink is dispens reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110,
- some conventional ink c was dispensed from outside the case after the ink reservoir elemen with the case (after the assembly of the ink cartridge is completely fi such a conventional ink cartridge, it was necessary to prepare a fra is completely concealed by case 200 such that it cannot be seen from problems in which ink spills outside as a result of the user accident ink dispensing plug 520 can be prevented
- Figure 40 is a diagram t method in which ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction devic
- this installation direction F is p longitudinal direction (direction of arrow B, X direction) of ink cartri is installed into refill unit 13
- Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is p needle 49
- Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is roughly formed int horseshoe shape, and the open end of the horseshoe shape is light emi which emits light, while the other end is light receiving part 57b (not the figure), which receives light
- This light emitting part 57a and l part 57b are respectively inserted into through holes formed by cas 213 and 223 and detection part 140, and are attached such that the back surface 56 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured suc not output (or outputs) a signal to a control unit provided on multifun
- Ink supply part 120 and detection part 140 are sequentially pr single end surface from top to bottom, and by usingsensor arm 470 remaining ink, the full use of the ink can be improved This is due to reasons
- ink cartridge 14 is installed in a pr case protruding parts 214a and 224a (first case welded parts 216 an 200 are inserted to slide on door main body 60, and the back surface o 14 is pushed in installation direction F until most of ink cartridge 14 i refill umt 13 Moreover, as described above, sloping surfaces 214a2 formed on case projecting parts 214a and 224a, so ink cartridge 14 ca inserted due to these sloping surfaces 214a2 and 224a2 As illustr 40(a) a ortion of the back surface of ink cartrid e 14 is ush art 20 214b2 and 224b2, and the movement in the vertical direction is restri plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 of refill unit 13, so it is possible cartridge 14 from being inserted diagonally and prevent remaining sensor 57 and needle 49 from being damaged
- the pushing retaini of the door member 60 contacts the push part 200a forming a porti surface of the ink cartridge 14, pushing the ink cartridge 14 in t direction F
- the door lock the door member 60 fits into the lock member fitting part 46 of the completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 (the state of Figu middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central position i direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14
- the position wher retaining member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position includi point p of the ink cartridge 14 and extending below the middle poi words, the push part 200a is provided at a position above the ink su and below the ambient air intake part 130 in the vertical direct illustration and description of this will be omitted, when the state of reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b fits into the latch p 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14
- the needle into the ink supply part 120 and ink supply is enabled * the valve ope of the ambient air intake part 130 contacts the back surface 56 o enabling intake of ambient air, and the remaining ink detection inserted through the through hole formed by the case cutout parts 21 the detection part 140, enabling detection of the remaining quantit details of this will be described later
- the pushing retaining member 61 is impell spring 66 as described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 cartridge 14 has been installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit force of the spring members 630, 650 730 and 750 of the ink supply m and the ambient air intake mechanism 510 act in the direction away on which needle 49 is arranged (leftward in Figure 40, in the directi the installation direction)
- the pushing retaining configured to have a greater elastic force than the elastic force gen spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able to stably r cartridge 14 once it has been installed
- the push part depressed by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substa middle between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air int allowing a substantially uniform elastic force to be applied to the in 120 and the ambient air intake part 130 This is because the ink c retained at three points in the installation direction of the ink cartr point at the front of the refill unit
- the pushing retaining member 61 pushes belo position (midpoint p) in the height direction of the ink cartridge 14, a not needed to operate the door member 60, making it possible to sta door member
- the push part 200a is arranged lower part of the back surface, for instance below the ink supply part will be able to close the door member with minimum force but since lower part of the ink cartridge 14 is pushed, the ink cartridge 14 m rotate and be pushed in tilted, so the needle 49 may not be inserted a the ink supply part 120
- push part 200a is arranged below the middle position of the ink cartr height direction and above the position corresponding to the ink supp large force is not required to operate the door member, making it pos install the ink cartridge at the prescribed location
- Figure 41 is a drawing ill state with the ink cartridge 14 having been installed in the multifun Since Figure 41 is drawing for the purpose of explaining the operat supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction device 1 and the like have been om drawing
- the light emitting pa light receiving part 57b (not illustrated) of the remaining ink detect are arranged at positions sandwiching the detection part 140.
- the shielding arm part 473c of the sensor arm 470 is arranged in the
- there is no spring flexible part 653 of the second supply spring 650 arranged o side of the supply slider 640 from the first supply spring 630 determine the flexing order of the first and second supply springs 6 other words, the first supply spring 630 with the flexed spring fle flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that when t inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second sup flexes thereafter
- the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the directi comprises dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various c the more components there are, the more likely that dimensional er
- the supply slider 640 is brought into contact with t part 626 of the valve member 610, at least the error in the dimensio supply spring 630 becomes irrelevant
- dimensional error of t mechanism 500 is reduced and the telescoping operation of th mechanism 500 becomes more stable
- the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferent the supply valve 620 and the outside diameter of the slider outer ci wall 641 of the supply slider 640 are formed to be substantially e and second spring members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider 644 of the supply slider 640 Furthermore, while the external shap outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 is formed sli than the inside diameter of the ink supply element 116, since the val part 622a is formed outward from the valve outer circumferential w supply valve 620, it becomes possible to prevent misalignment in t displacement when the supply valve 620 operates in the directio Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis Ol becomes m
- the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also u deformation, forming an ink flow path K indicated by arrow K
- the in is a flow path formed between the ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figu supply communicating hole 423, first supply communicating hole 4 through hole 683 (and second cover through hole 684) of cover 680, fi through hole 662b and second valve seat through hole 663 of valve s seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, ink flow path 654 of spring 650, slider through hole 645 of supply slider 640, ink flow pa supply spring member 630, first spring member 930 and valve bear and is a flow path which leads successively through the ink flow path valve 620 cutout 49a of needle 49 and the inside of needle 49
- the s needle 49 and is displaced in the direction of insertion (to the right i the needle 49 (displaced into the contact part flow path 615c)
- th part 613 has a structure cut out into a countersunk shape
- the ambient air intake mechanism 510 side will be desc ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is in multifunction device 1, the valve opening part 721a of the ambient contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, depressing the ambient air a result the ambient air valve 720 is moved away from the joint conta the ambient air joint 710, forming an ambient air intake path L as arrow L in the drawings Furthermore, when the valve opening par ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the back surface stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surfac joint skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand (o diameter As a result, it becomes tightly held against the back surfac the outside and inside of the joint skirt part 714 In the back surf inside of the joint skirt part 714, there is formed a passage 54 whic passage for taking in ambient air, which is admitted into the ink reser 111 via this passage 54
- the operation of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when th valve 720 is depressed will be described
- the first ambient air sprin inside the ambient air valve 720 (and the ambient air slider 740) as de has a slightly flexed spring flexible part 733, while there is no flexing intake mechanism 510 can be prevented
- the inside di slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the outside diameters of the parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spring member are formed to be substantially equal
- valve outer circum 722 of the ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the in of the ambient air intake element 117, since valve protruding part 7 outward from the valve outer circumferential wall 722 of the ambient misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient operates in the direction of axis 02 can be prevented Therefor operation in the direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mec stabilized
- ambient air intake path L is a flow path passing successively thro formed between the joint passage 715 of the ambient air joint 710, the 727 of the ambient air valve 720, the first ambient air s rin 730 circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intake element 117 also the ambient air intake path
- air is taken in such that the inside of the ink reservoir c brought to ambient air pressure
- the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and th intake mechanism 510 is such that they operate smoothly misalignment relative to the axes Ol and 02
- installation of the 14 is made easier while allowing the supply of ink and the intake of be carried out reliably
- Figure 42 is a drawing schematically illustrating t principle of the sensor arm 470
- the direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by force of the buoyancies and the gravities acting on the right side portio of the shielding arm part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the bal
- the description will assuming that all of the forces, which are exerted on the sensor arm 4 state where the ink stored is at least above the level of the lower en circumference welded parts 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b) since the ba of the sensor arm 470 is formed from resin material with lower specifi the specific gravity of the ink, the buoyancy generated on the bal increases, and the balance part 471 floats in the ink
- the combined force of t buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 cause a rotating force to the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl in Figure 43) but arm part 473c comes into contact with the arm supporting part 143 w the bottom wall 141a of the detection part 140 (enclosure
- the ink inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 passes through the K and decreases in quantity, the liquid surface I of the ink drops surface I of the ink drops, the blocking arm part 473c emerges on the I of the ink, and subsequently, the balance part 471 also emerges surface I of the ink
- the liquid surface I of the ink drops further the balance part 471 mo following the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterc rotating operation causes the shielding arm part 473c to move upwa the arm su ortin art 143, and an o tical ath is created betw discrimination can be correctly made
- the out of ink lamp is illuminated or audio is the user that the device is out of ink
- the ink supply part 120, intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged together on one s the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink suppl ambient air intake mechanism and remaining ink detection mech arranged together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1, p shape of the refill umt 13 from becoming complicated, and also red
- the ink supply part 120, being a part which supplies ink to flow out to the multifunction device 1 is preferably arranged at the the ink cartridge 14 so as to provide for more complete utilization of the ambient air intake part 130, being a part which takes in ambie ink cartridge 14, is preferably arranged at the upper side of the ink
- the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment make the arm part 473 larger so the balance part 471 will also h larger to ensure buoyancy of the balance part 471 Consequently, the which can be stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111, will decrease present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of the sen placed in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422 and the balan positioned at the middle of the ink reservoir chamber 111 in th avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor arm and adv ink flow
- the top end surface o arm part 473c (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned parallel to the liquid surface of the ink In this state, when the liquid ink drops and reaches the same position as the top end surface of the 473c, the surface tension of the ink acts as a force to retain the shieldi the force by which the surface tension of the ink retains the shieldi greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, the sensor ar operate properly
- the top end surface forming the detection part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle s downward, reducing- the portion of the shielding arm 473c that is parallel to the liquid surface of the ink
- the force exerted b tension of the ink on the shielding arm 473c can be reduced, allowi arm 470 to operate normally
- Figure 44 is a cross sectional vie the state where the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunctio wrong orientation
- the projection distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a fro is longer than the projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the member 48 Providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 prevents contact between the tip of the valve openi projecting outward from the ambient air intake part 130 and the tip o
- the needle 49 is a member for extracting the ink mside the ink ca supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrated) so if t where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately printing is not performed accurately Thus it is not desirable for the damaged or deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve open
- a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 as described above, collision between the needle 49 opening part 721a can be prevented, thus making it possible to prev deformation of the needle 49 and allowing the ink to be reliabl
- the position of the through hole (detection window) detected part 140 and the case cutouts 213 and 223 in the vertical up down direction in Figure 44) is displaced slightly from the center, the ink cartridge 14 is installed upside down from the prope orientation, the remaining ink detection sensor 57 may collide with th the case 200, which may damage the remaining ink detection sensor since a difference is provided between projection distance t8 and proje t9, it becomes possible to prevent damage to the remaining ink detec due to collision with the outer wall of the case 200, making it possible detect the remaining quantity of ink
- Figure 46 is a drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartrid multifunction device 1 and a front view of the ink cartridge 14
- Figure 46 (b) are drawings illustrating the state change when the ink removed
- Figure 46 (c) shows a front view of the ink cartridge 14
- the insertion hole 605 of the suppl ink supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through w out and the thickness til in the widthwise direction (the left rig Figure 46 (c) the Z direction) of ink cartridge 14 of the case projecti and 224a is made longer than the diameter tlO of the insertion diameter of needle 49 is formed to be slightly narrower than the diam through hole 605 )
- viewed vertically form the Y insertion hole 605 is accommodated entirely within the region occupi projecting parts 214a and 224a
- Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the str reduces the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b o unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14
- Figure 47 (a) illustrates the state o removing the ink cartridge 14 in/from the refill unit 13
- multifunct Figure 47 (b) is a drawing which illustrates the surface where the dete of the mk cartridge 14 is formed *
- Figure 47 (c) is a perspectiv cartridge 14
- the ink cartridge 14 of Figure 47 (a) is illustrated in sim without showing the detailed structure, as this figure serves to illust sha e of the ink cartridge 14 and its ositional relationshi to the cartridge 14, causing the ink held inside the ink supply mechanism forcefully, and the fact that when the needle 49 is suddenly exposed from the state of being positioned inside the ink supply part 120 ( where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and
- the detection part 140 when the ink cartrid installation orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned corresponding to the remaining ink detection sensor 57, so the detecti positioned above the ink supply part 120 (or needle 49) The major spattering from the needle 49 and ink supply part 120 spatters down to the direction of detection part 140) under its own weight, so the adh the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arranging the dete above the ink supply part 120 Furthermore, the detection surfaces 1 are formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the dete and the cap insertion hole 605 (see Figure 47 Ob)) The majority of the from the cap insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fash ink should spatter from the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will detection surfaces 140a and 140b, making it possible to reduce the a to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b
- the detection part 14 inside the case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is fo sides of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b by the case cutouts 213 a the detection part 140 is covered by the case 200, so even if ink s adhesion of the spattered ink to the detection surfaces 140a and reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply part 120 projects the case 200, in the installation orientation of ink cartridge 14 (the s 47 (a)), the distance to the detection part 140 becomes farther Thus, t the spattered ink does not reach the detection part 140, making it poss the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Further projecting parts 214a and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b formed at the ends, the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake located between the case projecting parts 214a and 224a and the c parts 214b and 224b and the case projecting parts
- Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is cross sectional view of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 49 shows a cross section of needle forming member 48 and in with the other elements making up the cases 40 and 2040 being om illustration Furthermore, in Figures 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is ink cartridge 14c, a black ink cartridge is show as ink cartridge 14k capacity black ⁇ nk cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14k2
- case 40 is configured to accomm cartridges so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arran four ink cartridges, three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14k adjacent thereto
- the large capacity black ink cartrid black ink cartridge 14k 1 is selectively accommodated at an end p direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left right direction in The case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a large capa cartridge 14k2
- case 2040 is configured to acco arranged ink cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four i three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a black in Figure 48 (a)) of case 40 is longer than the lateral width tl5 (th direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k 1, the left rig Figure 48 Ob))
- the difference between the lateral width tl4 of cas lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds to the difference between the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second case member 220 Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of t member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
- case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large ink cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 installation of black ink cartridge 14k 1 This implies providing users of multifunction device 1
- case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14k 1 and case 40 for in capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in external shape of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost red
- the ink supply mechanism 5 mechanism impelled by the first supply spring 630 and second supply when the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1, out from the ink supply part 120 or, in the worst case ink may spatte needles 49 are arranged continuously without any partition plates b between the needles 49, so when ink spatters from the ink supply spattered ink ends up adhering to the adjacent needles 49
- the black ink is a pigment t the color inks consist of dye type inks This is because black ink is used text printing, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low per paper in order to make the edges of the characters clear, while col primarily for image printing, so it is made from a dye type i permeability into paper in order to make the granularity of dots less it has higher viscosity compared to dye type in
- Figure 50 is a simplified cross section illustratin fashion the state of installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14k 1 and 14k2 i
- Figure 50 (a) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c insta and Figure 50 (b) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14k2 and 14 case 40
- accommodating gr 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the case 216, 226 and 1216 and the case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of ca 1200 Accommodating grooves 42c 1 to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all same shape
- the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and space between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separ tl2, while the space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42 separation distance tl3 longer than distance tl2
- the black ink cartridge 14k 1 is formed with a larger outer s other color ink cartridges 14c so the ink supply part 120 and ambi part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a position shifted by illustrated in Figure 13, or the difference between vertical wall parts the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the vertical wa to 121Oe of the first case member 1210 illustrated in Figure 11
- a prescribed space X is formed between the outer second case 220 of the black ink cartridge 14k 1 and the inner surf plate part 43
- This prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large ink cartridge 14k2 Namely as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serve refill unit 13 to be used for both the black ink cartridge 14kl and the black ink cartridge 14k2
- Figure 51 is a schematic dr schematically illustrates the combination of case members 210, 220, 1 2220
- Figure 51 (a) is a schematic drawing of case 200
- case 200 comprises first and second case members 210 the thicknesses of the first and second case members 210 and 220 vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b to 22Oe of the first an members 210 and 220» the left right direction in Figure 5l(a)) bein tl8
- Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200 Case 2200 comp second case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the fir 220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 1210 and 220, direction in Figure 5l(c)) being tl9 for the first case member 1210 a second case member 220
- three types of cases - 2200 with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volum from two first case members of different thickness and two second ca different thickness
- the thicknesses of second case members 210 and 220 forming case 200 are equal, and t of the first and second case members 2110 and 2220 forming case equal, but making the thicknesses equal in this manner is not an condition for forming three types of cases - 200, 1200 and 2200 - of shape sizes
- Cases 200, 1200 and 2200 consist of resin material and are manufactur molding
- a die corresponding to each case 200, 1200 and 2200 is necessar of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases
- at least two members are necessary to c them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid member, case member 210 for color deeper and providing a rib 1218
- the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 1218 in the first case used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertical wall 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore the first 1210 and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the the first case members 1201 and 210, and changing betwee corresponding to the first case member 210 and a member correspond case member 1210
- costs can be reduced as compared to whe molds are fabricated
- the first case member 2 capacity black has the same shape as the first
- cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from ea through holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta project to the outside are made the same shape, and substantially sem cutout parts 211, 212 221, 222, 1211, 1212, 2211, 2212, 22 corresponding to one half of these through holes are formed substantially semi circular shape in the first case member 210, secon 220, first case member 1210 for black, first case member 2210 for black and second case member 2220 for large capacity black a par structure can be used for each of the dies, reducing the costs of design
- case 1200 was made from the second 220 of case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substanti shape as the first case member of case 2200
- first case member 1210 formed to substantially the same combination of first case member 2210 and second case member 220 black
- any sort of combination may be used
- Figure 52 is a drawing illustrating the side surfa cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, and Figure 52 (b) shows th in the state with the ink cartridge 3014 installed in refill unit 3013
- the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon is configured with a different location of the ambient air intake compared to the ink cartridge 14 of the first embodiment
- ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge an ambient air intake passage 3131 formed in a labyrinth shape through hole 3130 formed on the top surface of the case 3200
- the refill unit 3013 o embodiment is configured with the position of the pushing retaining provided on the door 41 being lower than the position of the push member 61 provided on the door 41 of the first embodiment This is be no air intake part on the side surface opposite the pushing retaining of the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, and thus the elast when the ink cartridge 3014 is installed in the refill unit 3013 (the el to the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650) acts onl part of the ink cartridge 3014
- the pushing retaining member 3061 and t part 120 are configured to be substantially on the same line in t direction (the left right direction in Figure 52 Ob)) Being positioned su the same line, the direction in which the elastic force acts is also su cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments
- Figure 53 (b) is a perspective view illustratin appearance
- the ink cartridge 4014 of the thir has a through hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink c formed in a portion of its top surface (the top surface in Figure 53 admitted through this through hole 4130 passes through a labyrin intake passage 4131 (a relatively long passage with a small inside di admitted inside the ink cartridge 4014 A seal member 4132 is glu cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of the ink inside the 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal member 413 and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
- the detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting out end surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the 4014 (the up down direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is fo supply part 4120
- An ink supply opening 4121 into which needle 49 formed on the projecting tip of the ink supply part 4120 The ink car the third embodiment does not have a structure corresponding to element 100, and stores the ink directly inside the case
- the detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of em contain the sensor arm 470 inside it, as in the first example of em contains the sensor arm 470, then in the state where the ink cartri 5014 have been attached to the multifunction device 1 it is possible detect the amount of ink remaining Also, in the third and fourt embodiment, the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed from the c parts 214a and 224b and the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed protruding parts 214b and 224b have been omitted, but it is accepta these
- Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in the embodiment
- Figure 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state i cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the re case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that its edg different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of the fi embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the edge part of the case protru and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of the ink car first example of embodiment, and using the same references for the parts that ar first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted
- the case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protrud and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b an direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b B second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a and 21 truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as seen fro protrusion 55 will correctly match the steps 214a4 and 224a4, for possible to consistently prevent problems in which the protrusion 55 p protruding parts 214a and 224a and goes to the upper side of the case 55 or to the lower side of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a in thus the ink cartridge 14 is further inserted toward the back side of t right side in Figure 55) Therefore, it is possible to consistently pr cartridge's striking the needle 49 and thus prevent destruction or defo needle 49 and the remaining ink detection sensor 57
- the steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment ar L shape (or V or U shape) as seen from the side but it is also acce them corresponding to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In oth acceptable for it to be any shape desired as long as it is a shape that loose when attaching it in the wrong orientation and the edge of the fitted into the steps 214a4 and 224a4
- Figure 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the stat ink cartridge 14 of the sixth example of embodiment has been inserte unit 13
- Figure 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the elect of the multifunction device 1 in the sixth example of embodiment flow chart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection process th by the CPU 971
- the sixth example of embodiment has an additional attachment detection sensor 960 in relation to the multifunction devic example of embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the attachment detection sensor 960 of the sixth example of embodiment in the first example of embodiment, and therefore, using the same ref same items as in the first example of embodiment, the explanation o omitted
- the control board 970 includes a C is the calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory th overwritten and which stores the control program and the fixed valu 973 which is the memory that can be overwritten and which is use memory, the EEPROM 974 which is the non volatile memory overwritten and which stores data even after the power source is tur interface 975 which performs electrical connections between the ex and the control board 970 the inkjet printer 976 which perform discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal di which performs each type of display, the remaining ink detection se detects the amount of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and attachment detection sensor 960 that detects whether the ink cartrid attached or not, and the interface circuit 978 that performs input and type of signal While it is not illustrated in the figure, there are counters and timers included, the updating of the counter values an will be performed according to the processing performed within the C
- ink cartridge attachment fl ink cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink ca been correctly attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink ca been removed Further, once the ink cartridge attachment flag 9 turned on, it will remain in the on state until it is turned off by the attachment detection sensor 960
- the ink cartridge attachment detection process illustrated in Fi interruption process that is executed at the specific intervals (for ins ms) after completion of the initial set up process (not illustrated in th the power source has been turned on for the multifunction device 1 I explanation, the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will g rotrudin iece of the ink cartrid e attachment sensor is ressed, an When the ink cartridge attachment detection process is execute confirm whether the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 96 (SlOl), and if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is then there is no ink cartridge 14 attached to the multifunction devic the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a to be 0 (S 102), the will display onto the liquid crystal display part 35 that the ink cartri been attached (S 103), and this process will end In the event multifunction device 1 is being used for the first time after shipping the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been set to 0
- the value of the attachment flag 974a will be set to 1 (S 110), and this process will words, the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 and the detection sensor 57 will change in approximately the same timing, value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 1, by detecti of the ink cartridge 14, it will be set to the state in which it is possible the multifunction device 1
- the remaining ink detection detect the existence or lack of any remaining ink It is also po remaining ink detection sensor 57 to detect that the ink cartridge 14 i more correctly, that an ink cartridge with an enough amount of rema ink cartridge 6014 in the seventh example of embodiment, and Fig angled view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 701 example of embodiment
- the ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of th eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the shap surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will relation to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourt embodiment Therefore the structure other than the side surfaces on supply parts 4120 and 5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of e formed is the same as the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the thi examples of embodiment, and therefore, the same references for the the same as in the third and fourth examples of embodiment will be explanation of these is omitted As illustrated in Figure 59(
- the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the ink cartridges 601 the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are arranged withi arts 6100 and 7100 formed on the side surfaces so it is ossible of ink onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140
- the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eight embodiment can also contain sensor arms inside as in the firs embodiment By using a sensor arm 470, it is possible to accurat amount of ink remaining when the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 are the multifunction device 1
- Figure 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 13 of the ninth example of embodiment The same parts as in the fi embodiment have the same references attached and the explanation o omitted Also while the structure of the pullout member 65 of the d 60 in the ninth example of embodiment is different to that in the fi embodiment, the explanation of this will be omitted
- the ink cartridge 8014 of the nint embodiment has a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contac retaining member 61 of the door main body 60 and that protrude outside from the side surface 1 of the ink cartridge 8014
- oth pushing part 200a of the first example of embodiment was one par range of the side surface 1 of the case 200, but the pressing part 8200 example of embodiment has the structure where there is a spec contacts the pressing retaining member 61
- the ninth example of the structure of the pushing part 8200a is such that it protrudes surface, but it is acceptable to form it in the opposite concave shape In pressing retaining member will be constructed such that it protrudes main body 61
- Figures 61 63 the tenth example of embodi described Figure 61 is an angled diagram showing the external app reservoir element 100 is replaceable
- the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodime the same structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of em therefore only the structure that is different in relation to the ink c the first example of embodiment will be described and using the sa for the same parts as in the first example of embodiment the explan will be omitted
- the ink cartridge 9014 of the tent embodiment has a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 9100 is attached onto the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa the second case member 220 and the vertical wall part 210c and t surface 210a of the first case member 210
- the seal 91 to the side surface opposing the protector 300 opposite the edge sur the ink supply part 120, the ambient air intake part 130 and the dete are located
- the seal 9100 not only has the model of the ink cartridge it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink col is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored cartridge 9014 Therefore by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible visually recognize the ink color, making it possible to prevent stora cartridge 9104 in the wrong accommodating chamber 50 within the ca
- the element 100 is placed within the first case member 210, and fitting th
- the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has joining of the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 of the seal 9100 onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement ho 9201b , Therefore, by undoing the union of the engagement parts 92 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, it is possible to undo t between the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 I simply perform the undoing of the connection between the engageme and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b by pressing t engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement holes 920 from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case cu to 223 have been formed
- the seal part 9100 is a conne to connect the first and second case members 210 and 220, and it ser material, which can open and close the first and second case member Therefore, the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100 is undoing the connection between the engagement parts 9200a and 9 engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the second case memb with respect to the first case member 210, the new ink reservoir e inserted, and then, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are the present tenth example of embodiment, while the ink reservoir e replaced with new one, it is also acceptable to use a product in which re injected into the ink reservoir element 100
- the ink cartrid e 9014 of the tenth exam le o be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the an ink cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contai attached, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating printing
- Figure 64 the eleventh example of embodi described Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir eleme eleventh example of embodiment
- the ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is fixed within the first and second case me will omit a detailed explanation and description of the first an members
- the ink reservoir element 9300 of example of embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is fo injection moldeing using a resin material, and a bag element 9 flexibility and which forms a reservoir space to store the ink inside, connected to the hard part 9301
- the hard part 9301 has a d (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the light emitting the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 5 supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the supply first example of embodiment
- the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh embodiment is manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag p therefore, it is possible to have a simplified structure in compariso where the entirety of the ink reservoir element is formed through a m resin material Therefore, it is possible to improve the yield when the ink reservoir element 9300, making it possible to achieve a manufacturing costs
- Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams modified examples of the combinations of the case members
- the three types of cases 200 1 and 2200 were formed with differing sizes for the outer shapes using of first case members 210 and first case members 1210 and 2210 thicknesses, and the two types of second case members 220 and secon 2220 with different thicknesses
- the combinatio members in this modified example can be formed of four types differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where the int is different)
- case Cl is formed of a case member 12 member r21
- the thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the th case member r21 is t21 which is thicker than the thickness t20
- case C2 is formed of the case member 121 and the case illustrated in Figure 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65(
- the small scal large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C4 are the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases Cl to C4 are all diffe relationship C1 ⁇ C4 ⁇ C3 ⁇ C2 Therefore, it is possible to form fo different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be stored case members 120, r21, 121 and r22
- This second condition is that the difference (t22 the thickness t22 of one side of the case member (case member r22) w largest first ink cartridge (case C2) and the thickness t21 of one si member (case member r2l) that forms the smallest third ink cartridg different than the difference (t21 t20) between the thickness t21 of th the case member (case member 121) that forms the largest first ink the thickness t20 of the other side of the case member (case member 1 the smallest third ink cartridge
- the small scal large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C6 are the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 ar with the relationship C5 ⁇ C6 ⁇ C3 ⁇ C2 Therefore, it is possible to fo with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be sto four case members 120, r21, 121 and r22
- Figure 6 illustrated in Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in explanation of this will be omitted here
- Figure 67 (b is formed of the case member 122and the case member r22
- the thic case members 122 and r22 are formed of t22
- the case C3 is formed of the case member 120 member r22
- the case C8 is formed of the case member 122 and the r21
- the difference between the thickness t22 of the case me the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is different than the differ the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickness t20 of the 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
- the case members that form each c thickness of the case members that are placed on one side are diffe thicknesses of the case members that are placed on the other side, it form four cases with different outer sizes (different internal capaci four case members
- the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 ar direction of the supply joint 610 and the ambient air joint 710 to bloc path K and the ambient intake path L
- the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 ar direction of the supply joint 610 and the ambient air joint 710 to bloc path K and the ambient intake path L
- the coil spring is formed such that at of it is conical, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of th mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism
- the film 160 that is we frame 110 was constructed of a nylon layer on the frame part 110 side communicating passage 433 is constructed of a film 160, it is possible formation of a meniscus within the ambient air communicating Therefore, it is acceptable to have a construction in which the communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily slop and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in t the ink cartridge 14 is attached
- the welding of the case 200 can be substituted with attach adhesive as it is only important to ensure that the first and second 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability
- the unit of ink cartridges of the present invention is widely used office uses
Landscapes
- Ink Jet (AREA)
Abstract
A unit of ink cartridges including at least three types of ink cartridges having different sizes is provided. Each ink cartridge has a first casing member and a second casing member. A first ink cartridge is larger in size than the second ink cartridge, and the second ink cartridge is larger in size than the third ink cartridge. The first casing member of the second ink cartridge is the same as the first casing member of the first ink cartridge, and the second casing member of the second ink cartridge is the same as the second casing member of the third ink cartridge.
Description
DESCRIPTION
UNIT OF INK CARTRIDGES Technical Field
The present invention is related to a unit of ink car specifically to a unit of ink cartridges, which reduces the number of co costs for manufacturing ink cartridges having different outer sizes Background Art
Conventionally, an ink cartridge provided with a casing h storing chamber which stores ink therein has been known Th chamber of the ink cartridge may store color ink such as yellow in magenta ink for performing color printing The ink storing cham black ink for performing black and white printing Three ind cartridges may be provided for storing yellow ink, cyan ink and respectively A single ink cartridge may include three ink storing storing yellow ink, cyan ink and magenta ink respectively in one b cartridge for black ink may include an ink storing chamber which capacity as that of an ink cartridge for yellow, cyan and magent include an ink storing chamber which has twice the capacity as t cartridge for yellow, cyan and magenta ink In other words, the ink c different amount of ink stored in the ink storing chamber for diffe accordance with a consumed amount of the ink, and the ink cartridge outer size in accordance with a different size of the ink storing cha cartridges are disclosed in JP 07 108688
Further, in recent years, to improve printing quality, there have ink cartridges for storing a plurality of color inks such as normal c cyan ink, normal magenta ink and light magenta ink in additio cartridges for storing yellow ink, cyan ink and magenta ink These c dif ent amo n s f ks stored in the ink storin chambers and d
that at least two parts are molded and the molded parts are connecte to manufacture an ink cartridge, since the ink cartridge has an i forming the ink storing chamber Therefore, as the number of ink co increases and the number of ink cartridges having different outer si the number of parts which are molded by die molding increases T increase in manufacturing costs
It is an object of the present invention to provide a unit of i which reduces the number of parts for manufacturing ink cart different outer sizes
The object is solved by a unit of ink cartridges according to cla developments are specified in the dependent claims
The first and the third ink cartridge have a different height direction of the extended wall Further, since the second ink cartridg first casing member of the first ink cartridge connected with the member of the third ink cartridge, the second ink cartridge has an ou is different from the outer sizes of the first and third ink cartridge members, two of which form the casing of the first ink cartridge and t which form the casing of the third ink cartridge, can provide three cartridges each of which has different size in the height direction of wall Therefore three different cartridges, each of which has differ can be manufactured with four casing members Compared to the t cartridges which are manufactured with two specific molded casing each cartridge (six casing members are required to be molded in total of components can be reduced and costs are also reduced
The passage for supplying ink from the ink storing chamber can be formed by connecting the first cutaway portions of the first c and the second casing member to each other Therefore, the passage ink from the ink storin chamber to the outside is formed sim l b c
cartridge may be the same as the height of the extended wall of the member of the first ink cartridge, and the height of the extended w casing member of the third cartridge may be the same as the height o wall of the second casing member of the third ink cartridge Accordin of dies for molding the casing members can be commonly formed so th forming the dies can be reduced
The difference between the height of the extended wall of t member of the first ink cartridge and the height of the extended wal casing member of the third ink cartridge may be different from between the height of the extended wall of the second casing member cartridge and the height of the extended wall of the second casing third ink cartridge Therefore, four ink cartridges having four differe can be manufactured by connecting the four casing memb manufacturing a plurality of ink cartridges, costs can be further reduc
The first casing member of the first ink cartridge may have a rib e the plate member along a height direction of the extended wall, where the rib corresponds to the difference between the height of the extend first casing member of the first ink cartridge and the height of the ex the first casing member of the third ink cartridge Therefore, the first cartridges have the same inner space size, although having differen In other words the ink cartridges having different outer sizes and ha ink storing chamber in capacity can be manufactured Assuming th is a pigment based ink, once a dye based color ink is mixed with the b inkjet recording apparatus, a large amount of ink is required to be e print head to recover the color ink It is preferable that the ink cartr ink is formed distinguishably in shape from other ink cartridges for prevent the erroneous mounting of ink cartridges On the other han rintin is mainl erformed, the ink cartridge storin a lar e amoun
mechanism which opens and closes the penetration opening accommodation space for accommodating the valve mechanism c simply by connecting the casing members
In an ink cartridge the cutaway portion for forming the penetr is formed in the same shape for each of the casing members and the extended wall of the first casing member is larger than the height of wall of the second casing member Due to the shape of the cutaway similar, the shape of the die for molding each of the casing members i reduces the costs for designing the dies Due to the height of the e being different for the first casing member and the second casing me cartridge can be manufactured by combining a first casing member o cartridge and a second casing member of a smaller ink cartridge, further dies are required for the ink cartridge Brief Description of Drawings FlG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the device of the present invention FlG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit
FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill opened
FlG 4 is a cross sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figur IV IV line
FlG 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the door of the refill FlG 7 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of cartridge
FlG 8 is an angled diagram showing the details of the color ink cart FlG 9 IS a dia ram showin the rotector where (a) is a to surface d
FlG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capa cartridge
FlG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is the ink reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reser
FlG 15 is a diagram showing the supply path formation part, w diagram showing a summary of the supply path formation pa of the frame part), (b) is a cross sectional diagram showing th formation part in Figure 15(a) along the XVb XVb line, (c) showing the state in which the amount of ink has been reduce diagram showing the completion of the ink supply
FlG 16 IS a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, angled diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path f (b) is a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part i along the arrow XVIb perspective, and (c) is a diagram showin air path formation part in Figure 16(a) along the arrow XVIc p
FlG 17 is a diagram showing the injection path formation part, diagram showing a summary of the injection path formation p a cross sectional diagram of the injection path formation part i along the XVIIb XVIIb line
FlG 18 is a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) showing a summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a c diagram of the detection part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIII and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the detection part in along the XVIIIc XVIIIc line
FlG 19 is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a fron sensor arm and (b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in along the arrow XIXb perspective
FlG 20 is a dia ram showin one art of the ink reservoir element
mechanism
FlG 23 is a diagram showing the supply cap where (a) is a diagra side of the supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surfac cap in Figure 23(a) along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply cap, (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the supply cap and (e) is a cross sectional d supply cap in Figure 23(c) along the XXIIIe XXIIIe line
FlG 24 is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar supply joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (d) is a cross sectional diagram of the supply joint in Figu the XXIVd XXIVd line
FlG 25 is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply valve, (b) is a diagram showing the side of th in Figure 25(a) along the arrow XXVb perspective, (c) is a dia the planar surface of the supply valve, (d) is a diagram showi surface of the supply valve, and (e) is a cross sectional diagram valve in Figure 25(c) along the XXVe XXVe line
FlG 26 is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) showing the side of the first supply spring (b) is a diagram planar surface of the first supply spring, (c) is a diagram showi surface of the first supply spring, and (d) is a cross sectional d first supply spring in Figure 26(b) along the XXVId XXVId line
FlG 27 is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagra side of the supply slider (b) is a diagram showing the side slider in Figure 27(a) along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) showing the planar surface of the supply slider (d) is a diagra bottom surface of the su l slider and (e) is a cross sectional
side of the check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar check valve, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of th and (c) is a cross sectional diagram of the check valve in Figu the XXIXd XXIXd line
FlG 30 is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram show the cover, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the diagram showing the bottom surface of the cover, and (d) is a c diagram of the cover in Figure 30(b) along the XXXd XXXd line
FlG 31 IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing t ambient air cap in Figure 3l(a) along the arrow XXXIb persp diagram showing the planar surface of the ambient air cap, (d) showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cap a cross sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in Figure 3l XXXIe XXXIe line
FlG 32 is a .diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) showing the side of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showi surface of the ambient air joint, (c) is a diagram showing the b of the ambient air joint, and (d) is a cross sectional diagram o air joint in Figure 32(b) along the XXXIId XXXIId line
FlG 33 is a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a dia the side of the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showi surface of the ambient air valve
FlG 34 is a partial cross sectional diagram showing the state in w supply mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanis assembled into the ink supply unit and the ambient air intake
FlG 35 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes prior to film
mechanism onto the frame part (b) is a diagram showing reducing process, and (c) is a diagram showing the ink injectio
FlG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, diagram showing the process to sandwich the frame part by th is a diagram showing the welding process to weld the case
FlG 39 is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that prior to shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagra process to attach the protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showi to package the ink cartridge using the packaging unit
FlG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink ca multifunction device
FlG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartri attached to the multifunction device
FlG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm corres amount of ink remaining within the ink reservoir chamber, w the state in which there is ink remaining, and (b) shows the s there is no ink remaining
FlG 43 is a diagram showing the operation theory of the diagrammatically
FlG 44 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the has been attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong o
FlG 45 is a diagram showing the method of removing the ink cartr inkjet recording device
FlG 46 is a diagram showing the front perspective of the ink cart state in which it is removed from the multifunction device
FlG 47 is a diagram showing the structure to reduce adherence of th detection surface of the detection part of the ink cartridge, wh the state in which the ink cartrid e has been removed from the
case, where (a) is a cross sectional diagram showing a summa in Figure 48(a) along the XXXXIXa XXXXIXa line, a cross sectional diagram showing a summary of the case in Figu the XXXXIXb XXXXIXb line
FlG 50 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which each has been attached within the case
FlG 51 is a diagram showing the combination of the ca diagrammatically
FlG 52 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit acc second example of embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showi the ink cartridge according to the second example of embodime diagram showing the cross section of the state in which the ink been attached within the refill unit
FlG 53 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third and fourth examples of embodiment, w angled diagram showing the external appearance of the according to the third example of embodiment, and (b) is an a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
FlG 54 is an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge accordin example of embodiment
FlG 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the according to the fifth example of embodiment has been attach refill unit
FlG 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state in which the according to the sixth example of embodiment has been attach refill unit
FlG 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the electrical st
diagram showing the external appearance of the ink cartridg the eighth example of embodiment FlG 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit ac ninth example of embodiment FlG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of th according to the tenth example of embodiment FlG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartrid the tenth example of embodiment
FlG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the ink FlG 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to example of embodiment
FlG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
FlG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members
FlG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combinati members Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
Preferable embodiments of the present invention will be descri with reference to the attached drawings Figure 1 is an oblique vie appearance of multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 o invention is installed
Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction scanner part 12 is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 device 1 is an MFD (Multi Function Device) in which printer part 1 part 12 are provided as a unit, and it has various functions such function, scanner function, copy function, and facsimile function
Multifunction device 1 is rimaril connected to a com uter (ext
equipped with slot part 23, which is described below, and by loading v recording media such as memory cards into this slot part 23, the dev data such as image data recorded on the recording medium to recordi
In multifunction device 1, printer part 11 is configured as an ln device, and refill unit 13, which stores ink that is supplied to a recor illustrated in the figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is eq base of the front surface of multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 design and is configured such that ink cartridge 14 can be easily repl will be described in detail below
Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which functi (Flatbed Scanner) and document cover 16, which is provided on the this document bed 15 (top of figure l) Document cover 16 is e automatic document feeder (ADF Auto Document Feeder, called 'A 17, and it is attached to the back side of document bed 15 (back sid using a hinge such that it can be freely opened and closed Theref cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating in the direction of arrow A document bed 15 In this embodiment, document bed 15 constitutes a housing of multifunction device 1, and document cover 16 constitute the top surface of multifunction device 1
Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illu figure) between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is an image reading unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside placed between document cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, a reading unit reads images from the document by moving along the sheet from the bottom of the contact glass sheet
Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is co that it can consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of doc document tra 18 to a er e ection tra 19 Moreover, ADF 17
multifunction device 1 (front side of Figure l) and on the b multifunction device 1 (bottom side of Figure l) In other words re built in to the front surface Ia side and the bottom surface Ib side of device 1 In this embodiment, refill unit 13 is configured such that it hold four ink cartridges 14, and black, yellow, magenta, and cyan stored in each of these ink cartridges 14 The ink of each color cartridges 14 is supplied to the recording head through ink tube 53 (s
Moreover, opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening the end of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure l) is p front surface of refill unit 13 (front of Figure l) Opening/closin configured such that it can be freely rotated between a position in w refill unit 13 through opening 21 and a position in which it closes o houses refill unit 13 by folding it over to the front (front direction in F
Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifun and a paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned insid 22 (in Figure 1, the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged i After the recording paper that is sent from the paper feed tray is se side it is sent to the top and finally fed to the front side, and image onto the recording paper while the recording paper is fed The recor then discharged to a paper ejection tray (not illustrated in the fi provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside opening 22
Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front s multifunction device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure l) panel 30 is an operation part for the purpose of performing the operati part 11 and scanner part 12 and it is equipped with various operati and liquid crystal display part 35 The various operation keys 31 3 operation panel 30 are connected to a control device (or a control circ illustrated in the figure) used as a control means for controlling m
Slot part 23 through which recording media such as various small can be loaded is equipped on the bottom of operation panel 30 (botto Image data is stored on the small memory card, and the image data ( related to image data) that is read out from the small memory card i liquid crystal display part 35 The device is configured such that ar displayed on liquid crystal display 35 can then be recorded to recordin operation of operation panel 30
Next refill unit 13 will be described with reference to Figures 2 6 oblique view of refill unit 13 Figure 3 is a side view of the state in w refill unit 13 has been opened Figure 4 is a cross sectional view of through line IV IV of Figure 2, and the state in which ink cartridges 1 is illustrated Figure 5 is a cross sectional view of refill unit 13 throu Figure 2, and the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illus 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 41 of refill unit 13 Fig illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is removed
As illustrated in Figure 2 refill unit 13 is primarily equipped wit which ink cartridges 14 are inserted and removed, and door 41, whic to this case 40 Case 40 is formed into a roughly rectangular parallel whole, and, as illustrated in Figure 4, accommodating chambers 50 ( that house and hold ink cartridges 14 are partitioned and formed on this embodiment, case 40 has four accommodating chambers 50? cartridges 14 are inserted into and removed from each accommodatin The inner wall surface shape of each accommodating chamber 50 i that it demarcates space corresponding to the outside shape of ink car when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is held inside ca rattling
As illustrated in Figure 2, case 40 is equipped with bottom plate late arts 43 that are rovided on the left and ri ht sides of this bott
direction As illustrated in Figure 4, partition walls 47 are formed i provided from the top and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling Further, partition wall parts 47 do not need to completely p accommodating chamber 50, so they may be of any shape as long protrudes to the inside from at least one of bottom plate part 42 or cei 44 and divides the space between adjacent accommodating chambers
Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 2 cutout part 40a (opening opened is formed on the back side of case 40 (back right side of Figure forming member 48 is fitted into this cutout part 40a Needle member) that extracts the ink inside ink cartridges 14 is formed on n member 48 based on the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in a chambers 50 of case 40
As illustrated in Figure 5, needle 49 extends along the direction of case 40 and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installatio the state in which needle forming member 48 is engaged with cut When an ink cartridge 14 is installed in an accommodating chamber 49 is inserted into ink supply part 120 (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge supply path is formed as supply valve 620 (see Figure 22) of ink supp 500 (see Figure 22) is pressed Needle 49 communicates with ink extr 52 that projects upward on the back side of case 40 (right side of Figu tube 53 is connected to this ink extraction opening 52 Ink tube 53 is c mkjet recording head (not illustrated in the figure), and it is able to s inside ink cartridges 14 to the inkjet recording head
Passage 54 which introduces ambient air into ink cartridges 14 the side wall of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure ink inside ink cartridges 14 is extracted through needle 49, corresponding to the extracted ink passes through passage 54 and is ink cartridges 14
cartridge 14 is also given below
On the back side of case 40, remaining ink detection sensor 57 wh height of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge 1 between needle 49 and passage 54 This remaining ink detection transmissive optical sensor that has light emitting part 57a and light 57b, and it is provided according to the number of ink cartridges accommodating chambers 50 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is position corresponding to detection part 140 (see Figure 8) of ink cart state in which ink cartridge 14 is housed inside accommodating cha is arranged in a position in which light emitting part 57a and light 57b can sandwich both sides of detection part 140 of ink cartridge 14 accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detec is connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stor cartridge 14 is constantly monitored by this control device
Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves case 40 Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm m A tension spring is attached between swing arm mechanism 44b an part 44, and swing arm mechanism 44b is always elastically biased i of door 41 (front left side of Figure 2, left side of Figures 3 5) Swing ar 44b is configured such that the ends that project into case 41 (a chamber 50) engage with latch parts 217a and 227a (see Figure 8) of 14, for example, in the state in which it is elastically biased It is ther to reliably hold ink cartridge 14 that is installed in case 40
Opening 45 is provided on the front surface of case 40 (insertion which ink cartridge 14 is installed) This opening 45 is provided o accommodating chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating c successively provided inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four 14 are res ectivel inserted into and removed from each accommoda
accommodating chamber 50, and when door 41 is in the open position, 14 can be easily inserted into and removed from accommodating cha
Here, the structure of door 41 will be described in detail with refer 6 Door 41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining m is provided on this door main body 60, door lock member 62 (lock ba (locks) door 41 to case 40, and lock release lever 63 that releases do fastened state Door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61, doo 62 and lock release lever 63 are each molded using resins
As illustrated in Figure 6, door main body 60 is roughly formed i the shape of a long and thin rectangle The external shape of door m formed according to the shape of opening 45 of case 40 Rotating which is supported on the lower part of the front surface of case 40, is bottom end of door main body 60 (bottom side end in Figure 6) Speci part 42a is formed on the front end of bottom plate part 42 of case 40 ( 3, and 4), and rotating shaft part 64 is fitted into this bearing part 42 can rotate freely As a result, door main body 60 can close opemng 45 b or open opening 45 by folding over
Pullout member 65, which is formed as a unit with door mai provided on the bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout roughly formed into an L shape, and it has extension part 65a and cu Extension part 65a is successively provided on the bottom end of door (rotating shaft part 64), and curved part 65b is successively provide approximately 90° angle with extension part 65a
When door 41 is in the blocked position (state illustrated in Figur curved part 65b projects even further upwards than installation accommodating chamber 50 (bottom surface inside accommodating ch makes contact with the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14, see Figure bod 60 rotates around rotatin shaft art 64 as a rotational center, a
65 is set to a prescribed dimension, so when curved part 65b is rotat surface 65c is slightly higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 parallel to installation surface 51
Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides in onto installation surface 51 inside accommodating chamber 50 in the door 41 is in the open position As a result, pullout member 65 functio a member for pulling ink cartridge 14 out of accommodating chamber a guiding member when inserting ink cartridge 14 into accommodatin
In this embodiment, two pullout members 65 are provided on e body 60 In other words, pullout members 65 are configured such positioned opposite the width direction of door main body 60 an cartridge 14 by sandwiching it in the width direction Moreover in thi the spacing between each of the pullout members 65 is set to be sm width direction of ink cartridge 14
Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member protrudes to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodati which claw 61a is housed, is provided on door main body 60 Claw ac part 60a is configured from a groove that extends in a direction t perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of door main body 60 (ver in Figure 6) Claw 61a is fitted into claw accommodating part 60a su slide freely, so pressing retaining member 61 is supported such that i and retreat in a direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal dir main body 60 In other words, pressing retaining member 61 can ch between a projected position in which it is raised from the inside s main body 60 (state illustrated in Figure 3) and a retreated position i retreated from the projected position to the side of door main b illustrated in Figure 4) Moreover, coil spring 66 is placed betw retaining member 61 and door main body 60 Therefore, pressin reta
cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positioned with respect to
In this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is formed in flat plate, while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 6 makes contact with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when doo blocked position) is formed into a flat surface, and a pair of projectin formed on this wall surface 61b Therefore, when door 41 is in the blo these strips 61c make contact with and press against the side s cartridge 14
Moreover, pressing retaining member 61 is configured such that blocked position it presses slightly downward from the center p vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 (vertical direction in Figure 4) I pressing retaining member 61 is provided in a position in which it and presses downward from the center position in the vertical di cartridge 14 This is for the purpose of improving the operationahty which the user operates door 41 For example when pressing retaini is positioned at or above the center position in the vertical direction o 14, the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of lock relea the distance between the part that is operated by the user and retaining member 61 becomes small Therefore, the force induced by of pressing retaining member 61 becomes large, and a force that is la operate door 41 therefore becomes necessary On the other hand, retaining member 61 is positioned below the center position in the ver of ink cartridge 14, the distance between the part that is operated by pressing retaining member 61 is large, so the user is able to operate small amount of force Moreover, when pressing retaining member 61 too far downward in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 it press end of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 sometimes slopes inside ac chamber 50, makin it unable to hold ink cartrid e 14 correctl Ho
the top end of pressing retaining member 61 (upper edge of Figure 4) the center position of ink cartridge 14
Moreover, as will be described below, ink cartridge 14 of this e equipped with ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 13 surface opposite the side surface that makes contact with press member 61, and this ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake equipped with valve mechanisms having an elastic force In other wo a biasing force (first and second supply springs 630 and 650 and fir ambient air springs 730 and 750) that presses the valves (supply ambient air valve 720) outward such that they block communicatio interior and exterior or ink cartridge 14 Therefore, in order to r communication between ink cartridge 14 and the exterior, the el pressing retaining member 61 of this embodiment is set such that it the elastic force of the valve mechanisms of ink supply part 120 an intake part 130 As a result, when ink cartridge 14 is ins accommodating chamber 50, the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is reliably ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14 Moreov part 120 is on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on t the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating c pressing retaining member 61 presses against a position that is rela the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 comparison to the case in which it presses against either the top or ink cartridge 14, the direction in which the momentum acts stab cartridge 14 can be stabilized and held
Door lock member 62 is attached to the top end of door main unit top side in Figure 6) Door lock member 62 has main shaft part 62a, that projects in the direction of the inside of case 40 continuing from of main shaft part 62a (upper side of Figure 6), and seat part 62c (cont
this slide groove 62d, and door lock member 62 is configured such th slide up and down
Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key par shaft part 62a When door lock member 62 is fitted into door main uni is housed in claw accommodating part 60c provided on door mam body accommodating part 60c is configured from a groove that extends prescribed length in the vertical direction Therefore, when door loc slides upward or downward, claw 62e makes contact with the inside claw accommodating part 60c and the sliding of door lock member 62 direction is thus restricted
The sliding range of door lock member 62 is defined as a result of the length of the groove that constitutes claw accommodating p prescribed dimension When door lock member 62 slides upward w door main body 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the top edge of t surface of claw accommodating part 60c, door lock member 62 is in t which it projects upward from the upper end of door main body 60 member 62 slides downward with respect to door main body 60 and cl contact with the bottom edge of the inside wall surface of claw accom 60c, door lock member 62 is in the position in which it retreats to the main body 60 In this specification, the position at which door loc makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw ac part 60c is defined as the "projected position , and the position at w member 62 makes contact with the bottom edge of claw accommodati defined as the ' retreated position"
Coil spring 67 (elastic member) is placed between door lock memb main body 60 Therefore, door lock member 62 is elastically biase always projects upward from door main body 60 - in other words, in t which it is displaced to the projection position
main body 60 and key part 62b engages with the top edge of case 40
At this time, key part 62b of door lock member 62 is in a state fitted into lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which the top edge of opening 45 of case 40 Door lock member 62 is elastical that it always projects from door mam body 60 due to coil spring 67, s inside lock member fitting part 46 but the position of door lock me intermediate position such that it retreats slightly more to the retr side than the projecting side Door lock member 62 is always elast against lock member fitting part 46 when it is in the intermediate po lock member 62 never easily deviates from lock member fitting part 4
Lock release lever 63 is formed into the shape of a rectangular p attached to the top of the outside of door main body 60 in a state fastened to case 40 Door main body 60 is equipped with accommoda which houses lock release lever 63 This accommodating part 6Od concave part that is provided on door main body 60 This will be de and when lock release lever 63 changes positions, lock release lever 6 accommodating part 6Od
Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release le same time, pin support hole 6Oe into which supporting pin 63a is fitt on door mam body 60 Because supporting pin 63a is fitted into this pi 6Oe, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can rotate free rotational center of supporting pin 63a Specifically, lock releas configured such that it can be freely rotated and displaced between a p roughly parallel to the outer surface of door main body 60, a position inclined at approximately 45° (degrees) (state of door 41 on right sid and a position in which it is folded over roughly horizontally (state of t from the right side of Figure 2) by moving the lever In this spe position of lock release lever 63 when it is housed inside accommodati
release lever 63 is rotated from the housed position, through the ne and to the folded position, door lock member 62 slides from the proje through the intermediate position, and to the retreated position Put around, when door lock member 62 is in the projected position lock re is placed in the housed position and door 41 is closed, and in the state lock member 62 makes contact with lock member fitting part 46 of release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the housed position a position At this time, the central position of lock release lever 63 is se always moves to the neutral position due to its own weight Becaus lever 63 arrives in the neutral position due to its own weight, it improve the operationahty into the folded position
Here, the outline of the operation of lock release lever 63 will Interlocking cam 63b of lock release lever 63 makes contact with se door lock member 62 In the state in which door 41 is closed (state Figure 4), lock release lever 63 attempts to further rotate door loc through interlocking cam 63b in a direction pressing downward Howe member 62 is always elastically biased upward by coil spring 67, member 62 is not displaced by the action of the weight of lock release l and door lock member 62 is maintained in the intermediate position
However, when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for examp in which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates an release lever 63 - lock release lever 63 is rotated and displaced to the f When lock release lever 63 is displaced to the folded position, interloc rotates and changes the position centered on supporting pin 63a and part 62c of door lock member 62 downward As a result, door lock mem downward in opposition to the elastic force of coil spring 67 and is dis retreated position When door lock member 62 is displaced to the retre the lock of door 41 is released, and this door 41 changes from the block
almost completely housed inside door mam body 60 Therefore, when cartridge 14, because lock lever 92 is almost completely housed ins unit 60 rotating is possible with rotating shaft part 64 as the center the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so the user can easil cartridge 14 Moreover, the two strips 61c that are provided on wall pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing in inside accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part b parts 65b In other words, when ink cartridge 14 is to be accommodating part 50 the user may load the bottom surface of in onto strips 61c, place the tip part of ink cartridge 14 between curved then press ink cartridge 14 in the direction of accommodating chambe when ink cartridge 14 is to be removed from accommodating chambe should remove it until the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 reac strips 61c from between curved parts 65b
When multifunction device 1 is in normal use, door 41 of refill uni and lock release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position Therefore, in Figure 1 when opening/closing cover 20 is opened when replacing 14, lock release lever 63 slopes to the front surface side As a resul advantage that the user can easily operate lock release lever 63 I illustrated in Figure 1, refill unit 13 is placed on front surface Ia of device 1, so if lock release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position (if i front surface side), then it is necessary for a space that is wi accommodate refill unit 13 to be secured inside multifunction device 1 is necessary for refill unit 13 to be placed further back from the rim resulting in the risk that the external dimensions of multifunction become large However, in this embodiment, lock release lever 63 ca between the neutral position and the housed position when door 41 is position with respect to case 40 so refill unit 13 can be placed in the
reference to Figures 7 to 13 Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of advance, and cyan, magenta yellow, and black colored ink is store cartridge 14 However, with regard to the structure of each ink car cartridge 14 that stores black ink is formed such that it is slightly th ink cartridges 14 that store the other colors of ink This is because t black ink is generally the highest and it is expended in large quantitie black ink consists of pigmented inks, while colored inks consist of when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities of colore expended for the recovery process Therefore, the external shape of t formed into a large shape such that colored ink and black ink ca confirmed Moreover, the structures of ink cartridges 14 that store co all formed into the same shapes
First, colored ink cartridges 14 for storing colored ink will be d reference to Figures 7 to 9 Figure 7 is an oblique view showing appearance of a colored ink cartridge 14 Figure 8 is an exploded obliq colored ink cartridge 14 Figure 9 is a diagram showing protector 30 top surface view of protector 300 from the perspective of IXa in Figure a cross sectional view of protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figu following description, the X direction indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir element 100), the Y direction height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir element orthogonal to the X direction, and the Z direction indicates the w (thickness direction) of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir eleme is orthogonal to the X direction and the Y direction Arrow B illustrat is parallel to the X direction, which indicates the longitudinal di cartridge 14, and it indicates the direction in which ink cartridge 14 is refill unit 13
As illustrated in Figure 7, colored ink cartridge 14 is equipped
are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal materials, burned at the time of disposal For example, nylon, polyester or poly be used as resin materials
As illustrated in Figure 8, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily frame part 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores in and reservoir space including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink su which supplies ink stored in this frame part 110 to multifunction Figure l), ambient air intake part 130, which introduces ambient part 110, detection part 140 (irradiated part), which is provided in the amount of remaining ink stored inside frame part 110, ink dispen which dispenses ink into frame part 110, and film 160, which is welde of frame part 110 (both top and bottom surfaces in Figure 8) in order reservoir chamber on frame part 110 Descriptions of frame part 1 part 120 ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink dispen and film 160 and the manufacturing process for ink reservoir eleme given below
Case 200 comprises two case elements 210 and 220 that sandwic element 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8. Z di case member 210 is a member that covers the bottom side surface o element 100 in Figure 8, and second case element 220 is a member t top side surface of ink reservoir element 100 in Figure 8 First an members 210 and 220 are made of resin materials and are manuf injection molding The depths of first and second case members (lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z directio such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such th these depths is roughly equivalent to the thickness of ink reservoir el a result, the distance between ink reservoir element 100 and the ins case 200 becomes small (the gap becomes narrow), so even if pressur
210 is 210b the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wa 210c and the vertical walls that are respectively connected to verti 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe (the right side vertical wall part 21Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall p
Two case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing i 120 and ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 vertical wall part 210b of first case member 210 Case cutout parts 2 formed into roughly semicircular shapes from the edges of vertical and case cutout part 211 on the right front side of Figure 8 is a cutout to ink supply part 120, while case cutout part 212 on the left back sid a cutout corresponding to ambient air intake part 130 Rectangular c 213 which is cut out into a rectangular shape, is formed between ca
211 and case cutout part 212, and this is a cutout for inserting detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) to the position at which it sandwi part 140 Contact groove 211a, which makes contact with ink suppl formed on the inside surface connecting to case cutout part 211 of firs 210, and contact groove 212b, which makes contact with ambient a 130, is formed on the inside surface connecting to case cutout part 2 member 210 Because these contact grooves 212a and 212b are alignment of ink reservoir element 100 with first case member 210 be
Moreover, two case projecting parts 214a and 214b, which direction of protector 300 (left front direction and X direction in Figu surface on which case cutout parts 211 213 are formed (vertical wall formed on first case member 210 Case projecting parts 214a and 21 on both sides of first case member 210 in the Y direction (right fron left back side end of Figure 8) such that they sandwich case cutout pa and the ink supply part 120 side (right front side of Figure 8) is case 214a while the ambient air intake art 130 side left back side of Fi
installed, when sloping surface 214a2 makes contact with bottom w refill unit 13, ink cartridge 14 is smoothly led to the prescribed install due to its slope
On case projecting part 214a, case projecting cutout part 214al, w into a rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms t cutout parts 211 to 213 On case projecting part 214b, Case projecti 214bl, which is also cut out into a rectangular shape, is also formed surface that forms the side of case cutout parts 211 to 213 These c cutout parts 214al and 214bl are provided in order to prevent desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protector 300 is att 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which wil below, are fitted into these parts (see Figure 9)
Further case fitting groove 214b2, which is used as a fitting part i protector fitting part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) described be on case projecting part 214b This case fitting groove 214b2 is for portion of vertical wall part 21Oe from the edge of case projecting part the protector 300 side)
Moreover, rod member 215a, which protrudes in the direction o member 220 (Z direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on t part 120 side (right front side of Figure 8) and determines the p reservoir element 100 sealed inside case 200, and rod members 21 which protrude in the direction of second case member 220 (Z dir vicinity of vertical wall part 21Oe on the ambient air intake part 130 side of Figure 8) and determine the position of ink reservoir element case 200 are formed on first case member 210 The position of ink rese 100 is determined by the three locations of these rod members 215a to can prevent the attachment of ink reservoir element 100 in mistaken
Second case member 220 comprises a plate shaped part that
is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical wall
Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure th symmetrical to first case member 210 As with first case member 2 cutout parts 221 to 223 are formed on vertical wall part 220b and 221a connected to case cutout part 221 and contact groove 222a con cutout part 222 are also formed Case cutout parts 221 and 222 are fo same shapes as case cutout parts 211 and 212 of first case member semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is formed into the s case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular sh case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of cas
221 to 223, and case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 the direction of case cutout parts 221 to 223 towards the edge from th connects to the outside surface of vertical wall part 21Od of second cas Case projecting cutout part 224al (not illustrated in the figure) is f projecting part 224a, and case projecting cutout part 224b 1 and case 224b2 are formed on case projecting part 224b across a portion of ver 22Oe from the edge of case projecting part 224b On second case memb hole parts 225a to 225c (not illustrated in the figure) having holes i members 215a 215c fit after passing through in the direction of first 210 (Z direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod member of first case member 210 are formed
As described above, first case member 210 and second case emb 200 are formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are i which they hold ink reservoir element 100, roughly circular throu expose a portion of ink supply part 120 to the outside are formed b parts 211 and 221, while roughly circular through holes that expos ambient air intake part 130 to the outside are formed by case cutout
222 Through holes into which remaimng ink detection sensor 57 (see
projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ( second projecting part", or ' part") that contributes to the prevention of the aforementioned inst wrong position together with the protrusion that is formed from case p 214a and case projecting part 224a and the prevention of the damage as ink supply part 120 is formed by case projecting part 214b and c part 224b These protrusions will be described in detail below Moreo from Figure 8, ink supply part 120 is positioned closer to the protrusio case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a than the prot by case projecting part 214b and case projecting part 224b A thro which projecting part 330al of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is loose formed by case projecting cutout parts 214al and 224al, and a thro which projecting part 330bl of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is loose formed by case projecting cutout parts 214bl and 224b 1 while a fit the shape of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped into which ήrst pr part 320 of protector 300 (see Figure 9) is fitted is formed by case 214b2 and 224b2
As is clear from the above explanations, first case member 210 an member 220 do not only have the same overall external appearance, formed such that details such as case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 2 and case cutout parts 211 to 213 and 221 to 223 also have the Therefore, when first case member 210 and second case mem resin molded, their die shapes are similar so costs associated with die reduced
Next, the external shape of case 200 will be described On first an members 210 and 220, vertical wall parts 21Od, 21Oe 22Od, and 22Oe of both sides) in directions (Y direction) that are orthogonal to longitud B (X direction connecting the right back side of Figure 8 and the lef Figure 8> arrow B in Figure 8) are formed into concave shapes, and ste
In the following explanation, longitudinal direction B of first an members 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X direction) longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction o element 100, and the longitudinal direction of case 200
Here, first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second c described First case welded part 226 is connected to case projectin the same plane, and on the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, part 226a, which is formed into a concave shape in the direction o second case member 220, and engagement part 226b that engages member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when ink cartridge 14 is remo unit 13 (see Figure l) Concave part 226a is a region for securing range when pullout member 65 rotates Case welded part 227 has la which is formed into a concave shape in roughly intermediat longitudinal direction B of second case member 220 and this latch part that engages with swing arm mechanism 44b (see Figure 2) i which it is installed in refill unit 13
Although a detailed description will be omitted here, concave p illustrated in the figure), engagement part 216b (not illustrated in t latch part 217a (not illustrated in the figure) which are formed wit same shapes as concave part 226a, engagement part 226b, and latc second case member 220, are also formed on first case member 210
Next, protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 a is a diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of from the perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross se protector 300 through line IXb IXb in Figure 9(a) Protector 300 is protecting ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in pa reservoir element 100 when ink cartridge 14 is shipped Protector 300 a resin material and is manufactured using injection molding
which is fitted into the fitting groove formed by case fitting groov 224b2 (see Figure 8) is formed in the vicinity of the end of the si through hole 310 of protector 300 (left side in Figure 9(a)) Second pr part 330a, which is fitted into the through hole formed by case pro parts 214al and 224al (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 t formed in the vicinity of the end of the opposite side as the side protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in Figure 9(a)) and se fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through hole formed by c cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protector 300 provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector throug
Moreover, protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b, whi inserted into the through holes formed by case cutout parts 213 an side wall of detection part 140 (see Figure 8), are formed in roughly positions in longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (Y direction in Fi Protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b are connected to bo formed parallel to longitudinal direction C (top and bottom side walls i and they are formed such that they project upward (X direction on th the page in Figure 9(a) and on the side of ink reservoir element 100 Multiple ribs are formed from the bottom surface of protector 300, maintain the strength of protector 300
First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends parallel to a direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of (vertical direction in Figure 9(a)> X direction), and consists of protecto
321 provided from the bottom wall of protector 300 and two protector
322 that are connected to the side wall on the opposite side through hole 310 from protector vertical wall 321 (left side in Fi illustrated in Figure 9(b), each protector vertical wall 322 consists formed parallel to protector vertical wall 321 from the top end of
part 320 is inserted into the fitting groove, it is inserted as it is rest ends of protector vertical wall 321, which extends in the Z direction longitudinal direction C (Y direction), and the end of protector vertic longitudinal direction C Here, if first protector fitting part 320 is roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by case fitting and 224b2 (see Figure 8), the attachment of protector 300 takes time if protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the the position of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot b However, because it is inserted as it is restricted by protector vertical 322 at one surface (flat surface of protector vertical wall 321) and fou of both sides of protector vertical wall 321 and two ends of protecto 322) the installation properties of protector 300 are improved, installation can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 9(b), protruding parts 330al and 330bl, w away from one another are formed on the edges of second protecto 330a and 330b in the direction in which second protector fitting p 330b mutually separate (edges on the top side of Figure 9(b)), and sha and 330b2, which are formed into roughly cylindrical shapes, are direction of the bottom surface of protector 300 from these edges Figure 9(b)) Shaft parts 330a2 and 330b2 have elasticity because pr formed from a resin material, and protector 300 is attached and remo protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically deformed direction
Here black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to F 11 Figure 10 is an oblique view that shows the external appearanc cartridge 14 Figure 11 is an exploded oblique view of black ink cartri
As illustrated in Figures 10 and 11, black ink cartridge 14 is co that its external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z direct
formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z direction) t 300 Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regar member 1210, and descriptions of second case member 220, ink rese 100, and protector 1300 will be omitted here Only the depth of first 1210 (the thickness of vertical directions (length of Z direction) in differs from that of first case member 210, and the rest of its config same, so it detailed description will be omitted here
As illustrated in Figure 11, first case member 1210 comprises a part that forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b are provided in roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Figure 11) from the outer edge portions of the four sides of this plat Regarding vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe, the vertical wall t protector 1300 side of first case member 1210 is 1210b, the vertica placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b is 1210c, and the vertical respectively connected to vertical wall parts 1210c and 1210b are vert 121Od and 121Oe (the right side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121O side of Figure 11 is vertical wall part 121Od) Black ink cartridge 14 i that the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe are the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first cas for colored ink and the thickness of ink cartridge 14 is accordingly inc
As with first case member 210, case cutout parts 1211 and 12 formed into roughly semicircular shapes on vertical wall part 1210b, first case member 1210 in order to expose ink supply part 120 an intake part 130 to the outside of case 200, and case cutout part 1213 out into a rectangular shape is formed between case cutout part 1 cutout part 1212 Two case projecting parts 1214a and 1214b are fo sides of first case member 1210, and case projecting part 1214a has sl 1214a2 Rod members 1215a, 1215b and 1215c, which determine the
Because this rib 1218 is provided, the space (gap) formed between element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is therefore possible t strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
Moreover, by making the external profile of black ink cartridge that of colored ink cartridge 14, it is possible to differentiate betw cartridge 14 and other ink cartridges 14 Black is a darker color than o it is not preferable for it to be mistakenly loaded into refill unit However, because the external profile of black ink cartridge 14 is mad be differentiated from other ink cartridges 14, so mistaken install reduced Further, accommodating chamber 50 inside refill unit according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink cartridg installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colored 14
In black ink cartridge 14, the thicknesses of first case member 12 case member 220 in the vertical direction (Z direction) differ, so ink su ambient air supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positione shifted from the center position in the vertical direction (biased positi
Next, large capacity black ink cartridge 14 will be described wit Figures 12 and 13 Figure 12 is an oblique view that shows the extern of large capacity black ink cartridge 14 Figure 13 is an exploded o large capacity black ink cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figures 12 and 13, the external profile of large ink cartridge 14 is configured such that it is larger (longer in the Z d colored and black ink cartridges 14 Specifically, the vertical wall heig wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of second case member 2220 are formed s are roughly twice the vertical wall heights of vertical wall parts 22 second case member 220, and second case member 2220, which co 2200, is simpl made thicker than second case member 220 for colored
thicknesses of first case member 2210 and second case member 2220 direction (Z direction) are roughly equivalent, so ink supply part 212 supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 are positioned in the cen the vertical direction
Corresponding to ink cartridges with the three types of sizes desc is desirable for refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 to be configured equipped with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that hou cartridges 14 and a single accommodating chamber 50 that selectivel ink cartridge 14 and large capacity black ink cartridge 14 (the inne accommodating chamber 50 has a sized corresponding to large capa cartridge 14) This is because the frequency of text printing using on generally higher than that of color printing However a type of multif 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that it is equipped accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges 14 accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may b users that infrequently use text printing This will be described once
Next, ink reservoir element 100 will be described with reference Figure 14 is a diagram that shows ink reservoir element 100, and Fi front view of ink reservoir element 100, while Figure 14(b) is a bac reservoir element 100 The state of ink reservoir element 100 illustr 14 is the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunctio Figure 1) As illustrated in Figure 14, this is a position in which th direction (X direction) and the width direction (Z direction) of ink car reservoir element 100) are horizontal directions, and it is a state supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part 140 on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom ambient air intake part 130 is positioned on the ceding side Ink rese 2100 differs from ink reservoir element 100 onl with re ard to its thi
approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side walls) posi directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface si surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 the pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded Moreover film 160 is welded to both the front surface side and the ba of frame part 110, so the thickness of ink reservoir element 100 Z direction), which is formed into a flat shape, can be reduced in com case in which both sides are blocked by plate materials
First, frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame manufactured by injection molding using a resin material, and it ha because it is formed to be translucent (or transparent) This is becaus below, light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a of remainin sensor 57 positioned on both sides of detection part 140 is trans receiving part 57b in order to detect the amount of remaining ink in element 100
As illustrated in Figure 14(a), outer circumference welded par welds film 160 to the vicinity of the outer edge part, and circumference welded parts 411a to 417a, which are provided on the outer circumference welded part 400a, are formed on the front surfac part 110 Outer circumference welded part 400a is a vertical wall th the inner space of frame part 100 (space on the side of first chamb reservoir chamber 111) Moreover, the blackened edge portions circumference welded parts (ribs or first ribs) 411a to 417a illustra 14(a) are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), surface side edge (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded p welded surface part (fixed part) on the periphery of first opening 112 welded to this welded surface part by ultrasonic welding
As illustrated in Figure 14(b), outer circumference welded ar
circumference welded parts (ribs or second ribs) illustrated in Fig welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or second rib fixed parts) 411b to back surface side edge (blackened portion) of the outer circumferenc 400b is the welded surface part (fixed part) on the periphery of the 160 is welded to this welded part by ultrasonic welding
The inside of outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b c reservoir chamber 111 in which ink is stored The region on the fron illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir cha the region on the back surface side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is se 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111 Moreover outer circumference wel illustrated in Figure 14(a) is first opening 112a of frame part 11 circumference welded part 400b illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second o frame part 110
Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 42 14(a) and 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 an stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside ambient air co passage forming part 430 (see Figure 14(a)), which communicates wit intake part 130 and introduces ambient air into ink reservoir plate shaped link forming part 440 (see Figures 14(a) and 14(b)), whic roughly the center of frame part 110 (or ink reservoir chamber 111) an vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 to the vicinity of ink dispensing dispensing passage forming part 450 (see Figure 14(b)), which comm ink dispensing part 150 and dispenses ink into ink reservoir chamb link forming part 440 partitions first chamber Ilia and second chamb reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one it is a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a virtual lane S (not illustrated in the figure), in which film 160 tha
This ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 will be detail in a later process In this embodiment, ink reservoir cham frame part 110 (inner space) is provided as the region containin forming part 420, ambient air communicating passage forming p forming part 440, and dispensing passage forming part 450, but communicating passage forming part 430 is an ambient air passage f ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111, so it may alternatively be region other than ink reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110 (inne means that the space from ink reservoir chamber 111 (inner space) de excluding ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 considered the space in which ink is stored
Moreover, on the outer edge of frame part 110, thin plate shap parts are formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Fi bottom part of Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top 14(a) and top part of Figure 14(b)), and through holes 460a to 460c, i members 215a to 215c (see Figure 8) of first case member 210 descri inserted, are formed on these protruding parts
First, inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a will be d reference to Figure 14(a) Inner circumference welded parts 411a to 4 inner circumference welded part 411a, which is provided on supply part 420, inner circumference welded part 412a, which is provided o communicating passage forming part 430, and inner circumference 413a to 417a, which are provided on link forming part 440 Moreove surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are pos same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circumferenc 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path 420 and it consists of a downward slo in vertical wall that slo es
part 130, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall tha direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame pa vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a direction th orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (vertical direc 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are roughly T-s circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward fac shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal frame part 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame pa downward sloping vertical wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 Inner welded part 415a consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitu B of frame part 110, a vertical wall that curves roughly perpendicular faces the direction of the bottom part of frame part 110 from this vertic vertical wall that slopes downward from this vertical wall in a intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (Y dir circumference welded part 416a is provided in the vicinity of ink di 150, and it consists of a downward sloping vertical wall that slopes that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 Inner welded part 417a is provided in the vicinity of ink dispensing par consists of a vertical wall that extends in a direction that is roughly longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 and a downward sloping that slopes from this vertical wall in a direction that intersects wit direction B of frame part 110
In other words at least a portion of the vertical walls of inner welded parts 411a to 417a extends in a direction that slopes downwar orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (in other wor art side of ink reservoir chamber 111 in the position in which ink c
welded part 400a (scattered in multiple units), so they efficientl generation of slack in film 160 and avoid inhibiting the flow of ink
As illustrated in Figure 14(b), regarding inner circumference wel to 417b inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumf parts 413b to 417b are formed with roughly the same shapes as inner welded part 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 4 above and in positions corresponding to those of inner circumferenc 411a and inner circumference welded parts 413a to 417a, an circumference welded part 412b is formed with a different shape and position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a Moreov surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are pos same virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circumf part 400b, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual pla
Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumf part 412bl which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer welded part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitu B of frame part 110 (Y direction), and inner circumference welded part likewise consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumf part 400b in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal frame part 110] Inner circumference welded part 412bl and inner welded part 412b2 are provided from plate part 438, which demarcat communicating passage forming part 430 This is because communicating passage forming part 430 is formed only on the front frame part 110, and inner circumference welded part 412b circumference welded part 412b2 are provided in order to suppress the slack in film 160 in the portion corresponding to the back surfac ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 Moreover, as surface side, inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b become
even if the case deforms on the side of ink reservoir element 100 As possible to prevent the damage of the case and the damage of film outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b and inner circumf parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are formed with vertical provided on the front surface side or the back surface side, so extre dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection molded possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14
Next, supply path forming part 420 will be described with referenc Figure 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Fi diagram that shows the outline of supply path forming part 420 (d back surface side of frame part 110), Figure 15(b) is a diagram cross sectional view of supply path forming part 420 through lin Figure 15 (a), Figure 15(c) is a diagram that shows the state in which remaining ink has decreased, and Figure 15(d) is a diagram that sho which the supply of ink has been completed
As illustrated in Figure 15(a), supply path forming part 420 equipped with first supply communicating hole 421, which communi supply part 120, supply partition wall 422, which is formed i triangular frame when viewed from the direction perpendicular t Figure 15(a) such that it encloses this first supply communicating h part 427, which covers the region on the inside of supply partition extends parallel to virtual planes R and S between the planes, communicating hole 423, which is formed as a portion of supply partit cut out, supply concave part 424, which is formed by making a portion part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part of Figure 15(a)> portio of part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chambe circumference welded part 400b) into a concave shape (stepped sha 428 which extends from outer circumference welded art 400b and su
welded surface part of outer circumference welded part 400b (virtual space enclosed by supply partition wall 422 and plate part 427 chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that is supplied to in 120, and the space formed by supply concave part 424 and plate part part space 424a As illustrated in Figure 14(b), this concave part space than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamb space) in the height direction (Y direction) of cartridge 14, and it c portion of space that is positioned on the bottommost side (lowes reservoir chamber 111 As illustrated in Figure 15(a), first supply co hole 421 is formed above bottom part 400bl (same height as the top e space 424a), and second supply communicating hole 423 is formed part 400bl In other words, second supply communicating hole 423 is the lower side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part side) that first supply communicating hole 421 Arm sandwiching part 425 is roughly leftward facing C shape when viewed from the direction per the page in Figure 15(a), and a portion of the side opposite ink supply side in Figure 15(a)) is opened As illustrated in Figures 14(a) and part 411b and welded part 411a described above are provided such t the opposite sides as one another from plate part 428
As illustrated in Figure 15(b), supply partition wall 422 is form when film 160 is to be welded it separates the inside of frame reservoir chamber 111) and first supply communicating hole 421 In ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partition wall 422 c with the inside of frame part 110 only through second supply commu 423 As a result, ink that is stored inside frame part 110 is supplied i chamber 426 from second supply communicating passage 423, a supplied to ink supply part 120 from first supply communicating h illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path))
state illustrated in Figure 15(c), ink fills the inside of ink supply ch even if liquid surface I of the ink drops below first supply communic the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 120 through s communicating hole 423 In this embodiment, ink supply part 1 cylindrically shaped, as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as described belo ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed insi element 116, while shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) i first supply communicating hole 421 Therefore, taking into considera occupied by ink supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670, there is formation of first supply communicating hole 421 on the bottom side o chamber 111 (frame part 110) In a configuration in which supply par is not provided when liquid surface I of the ink drops below communicating hole 421, it becomes impossible to supply the ink, and the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes poor However, by s supply partition wall 422 and forming second supply communicating h bottom part side lower than first supply communicating hole 431, it supply ink until liquid surface I of the ink falls below second supply c hole 433, so it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink
When ink is further supplied from the state illustrated in Figure 1 surface I of the ink drops below the upper end of supply concave becomes lower than second supply communicating hole 423, ambient ink supply chamber 426 enclosed by supply partition wall 422 th supply communicating hole 423, and as a result, additional ink can supplied (state illustrated in Figure 15(d))
As illustrated in Figure 15(d), a difference of distance tl is pro part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber circumference welded part 400b and the lower end of second supply c hole 423 Here if second su l communicatin hole 423 is above
the vicinity of the bottom part of supply concave part 424 (part below communicating hole 423), and the amount of ink that cannot be s markedly reduced Moreover, supply concave part 424 is formed on t part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), so the ink in chamber 111 flows into supply concave part 424 and accumulates in s part 424 when the amount of ink becomes small Therefore, by estab concave part 424, it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink insid chamber 111
Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave is because the difference of distance t2 is provided between s communicating hole 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply co (side wall on the lower side in Figure 15(d)) As described above, when I of the ink drops below second supply communicating hole 423, cannot be supplied, so the ink that is between second supply comm 423 and supply concave part 424 remains inside supply concave par being supplied to ink supply part 120 Dust or plastic debris that is l frame part 110 when ink cartridge 14 is manufactured sometimes r the ink, but the specific gravity of this dust or plastic debris is great the ink so it remains in the vicinity of the bottom part of frame part 1 as illustrated in Figure 15(d), debris E remains inside the ink re supply concave part 424 When debris E is supplied to ink supply supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure l), there is a possi clogging will occur, making accurate printing impossible However, above, because distance t2 is provided between second supply comm 423 and the bottom part side wall of supply concave part 424, deb inside supply concave part 424, so the occurrence of ink clogging can
Next, ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 wil with reference to Figure 16 Figure 16 is a diagram that shows
430 is primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that comm ambient air intake part 130, second ambient air communicating which is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped that comm ink reservoir chamber 111, and ambient air connection passag communicates with first ambient air communicating chamber 43 ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surface film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a contained in virtual plane R) The chambers and passage of firs communicating chamber 431 and second ambient air communicating and ambient air connection passage 433 are formed as film 160 is front side of Figure 16(a)
First ambient air communicating hole 434, which communicates air intake part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b tha surface 437a of first ambient air communicating chamber 431 (secon is the surface of plate part 438 described above) In second communicating chamber 432, second ambient air communicating ho communicates with first chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111, the side of first surface 437a, and third ambient air communicating h communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111 second surface 437b (plate part 438) First ambient air communicati formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side in Fi communicating opening 433b is formed on side wall surface 432a of se air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first ambient air co chamber 431 (left back side in Figure 16) As described above, one of of ambient air connection passage 433 (side wall on the lower side in F inner circumference welded art 412a
are formed) Because a part having a passage that introduces am extremely small cross sectional area (ambient air connection pa provided (so called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow path whe passes through becomes large As a result, it is possible to reduce the more ink than necessary through ambient air connection passage 433
As is clear from Figure 14(a), ambient air connection passa downward in the direction of second ambient an- communicating cha first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Because ambient passage 433 slopes downward, the device is in the position in which in is installed in refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1, ink that has p ambient air connection passage 433 can be naturally returned to chamber 111 due to gravity Moreover because the cross sectional ar air connection passage 433 is made small, the penetration of ink sto reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection passage 433 ca Here, when ink penetrates into ambient air connection passage 433, formed and it is sometimes impossible to introduce ambient air result As described above, because ambient air connection passa downward, even if ink penetrates into the passage, the ink is ret reservoir chamber 111, so the formation of meniscuses can be prevented Further, ambient air connection passage 433 is formed as welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces is a side wal deformed by bending In other words, ambient air connection pa configured such that its cross sectional area changes easily Theref meniscus forms, the meniscus can be easily broken due to the deformation of this film 160, so ambient air can be introduced normall the surface of second ambient air communicating hole 435 is also form so the formation of a meniscus on second ambient air communicating be substantiall revented
communicating hole 436
Next, the mechanism that prevents the leakage of ink from communicating passage forming part 430 will be described with Figures 16(b) and 16(c) As described above case 200 of ink cartridg into a cubic shape containing a pair of largest surfaces that oppose o when this is loaded onto a flat bed the device may assume one o positions in which one of largest surfaces 210a and 220a forms the (bottom surface) At this time, ambient air intake part 130 is position surface of case 200, but, as described below it is difficult for ink ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 in either of the
Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air co passage forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading pos 16(b) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such tha connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side (the side of Ilia of frame part 110 is the lower side and first surface 437a is the lo Figure 16(c) shows the case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side (the s chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side and second surfac lower side)
As illustrated in Figure 16(b), when ink cartridge 14 is placed such air connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side during the t of ink cartridge 14, the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 p second ambient air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air co chamber 433 and penetrates into first ambient air communicating Moreover, as described above ambient air connection passage 433 c through communicating opening 433b, which has markedly smaller side surface of second ambient air communicating chamber 432, so t in which the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 does not necessaril
air connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side during the cartridge 14 the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flo ambient air communicating chamber 432, but liquid surface I of th reach the opening position of communicating opening 433b of connection passage 433 As a result, the ink does not flow into connection passage 433 from communicating opening 433b, so the in into first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Therefore, even i 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positione side, the efflux of ink from ambient air intake part 130 to the o prevented
As described above, by configuring first ambient air communic 431, second ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient passage 433 as described above and establishing the opening po ambient air communicating hole 434 and the opening position of c opening 433b in positions that are symmetrical to ambient air conne 433, it is possible to prevent the leakage of ink from ambient air in Further by making the cross sectional area of ambient air connec small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink and to prevent t into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
Here link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Fi forming part 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part dispensing part 150 inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and it is form the center position in ink reservoir chamber 111 Therefore link for connects two locations that oppose frame part 110, so it is also a member that maintains the strength of frame part 110 Link formi also a divider plate that divides the chamber such that the side of first and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the same region of late that divides first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b of
414a, and 414b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this a linking part 441 Further, the upper end of the height direction ( ambient air side linking part 441 communicates with inner circumf part 412a of ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 dispensing side connecting part 442, inner circumference welded par 417a, and 417b are respectively provided on the sides of first and se 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewed in the direction to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back side when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b)> here, perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z direction) from this di linking part 442
First linking communicating hole 443, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, is formed on ambient air sid 441 and second through fourth linking communicating holes 44 connect first chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b, are formed on d linking part 442 Here, if linking communicating holes 443 446 are linking forming part 440, first chamber Ilia and second chamber communicate in the center region of ink reservoir chamber 111 so slig sometimes arise in the amounts of ink in first chamber Ilia and se 111b If there are differences in the amounts of ink in first chamber Il chamber 111b, differences arise in the air pressure inside ink reservoi so the adverse effect that ink cannot be smoothly (or accurately) su However, by forming linking communicating holes 443 446 such th across link forming part 440, it is possible to make the amounts
420 is second reservoir internal opening 114, which communicates chamber Ilia and second chamber 111b In other words, the part t ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111 and the part that suppl inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside communicate in the forming part 440 and without the division of first chamber Ili chamber 111b As a result the introduction of ambient air and the su be performed in a stable space
Linking rib 418a, which connects multiple inner circumference 412a 417a provided on the side of first opening 112a from link forming linking rib 418b which connects inner circumference welded part provided on the side of second opening 112b from link forming part 4 on link forming part 440 These linking ribs 418a and 418b are not ill figure, but they are formed into thin walled shapes with vertical lower than inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and inner welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these linking ribs 418a formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result, linking ribs connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to 4 are formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintai of link forming part 440 Moreover, linking ribs 418a and 418b ar thin walled shapes, and they are formed with vertical walls that a inner circumference welded parts 412a 417a and 412b 417b, so it be to inhibit the flow of ink
Next, dispensing passage forming part 450 will be explained wit Figure 17 Figure 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage for Figure 17(a) is a diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passag 450, and Figure 17(b) is a cross sectional view of dispensing passage 450 through line XVIIb XVIIb in Figure 17(a) In dispensing passage 450, in the position in which ink is dispensed, it is in the highest
reservoir chamber 111, roughly U shaped dispensing partition wall provided from the outer surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, provided edge forms the forms the welded surface part on which film and partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect t chamber 111, and second dispensing communicating hole 454, wh opening part of dispensing partition wall 453 The opened part cylinder part 451 is opening 451a, which is formed on the outside frame part 110, and the surface that opposes this opening 451a is bot of dispensing cylinder part 451 The region demarcated by dispensing 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow path 453a
Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference which film 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 45 dispensing communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in whi welded As with the welded end part of the other inner circumference 411b to 417b, the welded end part of dispensing partition wall 453 is the same virtual plane as the welded end part of outer circumferenc 400b
A detailed description will be given below, but when ink is disp reservoir chamber 111, ink is dispensed in a state in which seco communicating hole 454 is positioned on top and first dispensing c hole 452 is positioned on bottom (position in which the Y direction is direction in Figure 17(a)) Moreover, ink sequentially passes throu cylinder part 451, first dispensing communicating hole 452, dispen wall flow path 453a and second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state illustra 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly from fi communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 45 ink is dis ensed smoothl without resistance
In this embodiment, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber is dispensed is lower than the ambient pressure Therefore, decompression process in which the pressure is reduced by aspiratin air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 from dispensing passage formi sometimes performed This is performed in order to reduce the amou air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to maintain the degree of deaerat and to reduce the generation of air bubbles inside the ink The deaera is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of the ink at a roughly c and this is because regarding the generation of air bubbles inside the bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), the pres to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (not the figure), so the ink cannot be correctly discharged
In the case in which a subsequent decompression process is perfor ambient air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is aspirated from dispe forming part 450, the resulting amount of ink is not correct, regardle or not an appropriate amount of ink was dispensed If the amount of i this causes losses to the user of ink cartridge 14, which is not preferab when first dispensing communicating hole 452 is enclosed by roug dispensing partition wall 453 and second dispensing communicatin placed above (upper side in Figure 17(a)) liquid surface I of the dispensing communicating hole 452), there is an amount of distance b surface I of the ink and second dispensing communicating hole 45 inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed, so it is substantially prevent the escape of the ink inside ink reservoir cham outside through dispensing passage forming part 450
Here, the structure in the vicinity of detection part 140 will be d reference to Figure 18 Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinit part 140 Figure 18(a) is a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinit
through which sensor arm 470 can be displaced Enclosure part 141 is roughly box shaped passage by a bottom surface, which is formed b 141a inside enclosure part 141 (lower side in Figure 18(a)), a pair of which are formed by both side walls 141b that are provided on bo bottom wall 141a an inner side surface, which is formed by inner that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side wal ceiling surface which is formed ceiling wall 14 Id that connects to th both side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and opposite bottom wall 141a Detection part 140 is also equipped with a part 142, which is provided such that it projects upward from the b formed by bottom wall 141a and supports sensor arm 470 from belo wall 143, which is provided from the inside wall of frame pa circumference welded part 400b) such that it connects to arm suppo and extends in the direction of supply path forming part 420, is p vicinity of detection part 140 As is clear from Figure 18(b) arm suppo is formed in the center of the width direction of the passage inside 140, and it is arranged such that the end of sensor arm 470 (shiel 473c) is also positioned in the center of the passage inside detection details will be described below, but sensor arm 470 rotates according of ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and it is a member that is that ink cartridge 14 has been installed in accommodating chamber 5 13 of multifunction device 1 (see Figure 4) and that the amount of has become low by detecting the position of shielding arm part 473c w ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) provided on multifunction described above, detection part 140 is translucent, and light from part 57a can be transmitted to light receiving part 57b Therefore, wh 470 (shielding arm part 473c) is positioned in the light path between art 57a and light receiving part 57b, it blocks the light to be rec
emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b are positioned in t detection part 140
As illustrated in Figure 18(b) the thickness of arm supportin formed such that second gap t4 between the inside walls of enclosure of wall surfaces, inside surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outsi supporting part 142 is narrower than first gap t3 between the i enclosure 141 (pair of wall surfaces, inside surfaces of both side walls outside of sensor arm 470 Here the ink stored inside detection part 1 and when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with this reducti liquid surface I of the ink falls below detection part 140, the ink in part 140 is depleted, but because first gap t3 between sensor arm 470 141 is minute, ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the surf the ink, and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due t tension of the ink Incidentally, the reason that first gap t3 is provide spacing is that, when this spacing is made wide, the spacing between part 57a and Jight receiving part 57b also widens and the detection remaining ink detection sensor 57 thus deteriorates Therefore by supporting part 142 such that first gap t3 > second gap t4, it is ensure surface tension that is generated between arm supporting part 142 part 141 is greater than the ink surface tension that is generated be arm 470 and enclosure part 141 As a result, the ink that remains in part 141 is drawn between arm supporting part 142 and enclosure pa possible to substantially prevent ink from remaining between sensor enclosure part 141 and to suppress the inhibition of the behavior of se Sensor arm 470 therefore behaves normally, so the amount of remaini accurately detected
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), bottom wall 141a on the lower par art 141 (lower side in Fi ure 18(a)) slopes downward in the dir
junction part of enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 be and this forms a shape that is conducive to guiding ink to the side o chamber 111 (or supply path forming part 420) In other words, the j enclosure part 141 and arm supporting part 142 forms a fluid guidin for guiding the ink As a result, it is possible to efficiently make the inside enclosure part 141 flow downward
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), vertical wall 143 that connects to a part 141 is formed on sloping surface 143a, which slopes downward i of supply path forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Slopin constitutes a portion of the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer welded part 400b) Further, as illustrated in the cross sectional view i the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame part angularly from a cross sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), a such that its thickness is roughly equivalent to that of arm suppor Therefore, vertical wall 143 slopes downward in the direction of forming part 420, and the junction part with the inside wall of fra formed into a roughly right angle so ink can be efficiently guided in t supply path forming part 420 by this slope and the capillary force I the junction part of vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame pa fluid guiding path (guide) for guiding the ink Because the thick supporting part 142 and vertical wall 143 are formed such that the equivalent, vertical wall 143 is formed in continuation from arm su 142 As a result, there is no resistance against the guiding of ink t forming part 420, and ink can therefore by efficiently guided
In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor ar contact with the ceding surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which o wall 141a of detection part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is t It is therefore possible to prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of
arm 470 is manufactured by injection molding using a resin material ( for example), and it has light blocking properties because it is formed
Sensor arm 470 is a rotating member that rotates according to remaining ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and a portion i remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) which detects t remaining ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 Sensor arm 4 equipped with balance part 471, which is formed from a material specific gravity than that of the ink, attachment part 472 which frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 473, which ext attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to bal (upward in Figure 19(a)), further extends sloping upward, and block possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Attachment linking part that connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a, which is atta sandwiching part 425 (see Figure 14) of frame part 110 is formed o part 472 This .attachment shaft 472a is formed with a diameter that i the inside diameter of arm sandwiching part 425 and is larger than th opening of arm sandwiching part 425 As a result, when sensor arm it can be operated with little resistance, and the deviation of sensor arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473a, which extends that is roughly perpendicular to balance part 471 (upward in Figure arm part 473b, which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473a, arm part 473c, which is used as a light blocking part that blocks possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57
As illustrated in Figure 19(b), arm part 473 is formed su substantially thinner than balance part 471 and attachment part because, when arm art 473 is formed with a thick profile, the scal
formed with a thin profile in order to prevent increases in the scale o 14 and to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Ribs 473d vertical arm part 473a and sloping arm part 473b, and the strength by these ribs
Roughly semispherical arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 shielding arm part 473c in two locations on the top and bottom of th inside detection part 140 (upper side end and lower side end in Figu these arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 reduce the likelihood of part 473c adhering to the inside wall of detection part 140 due to the s of the ink and becoming unable to rotate In other words, because ar parts 473el and 473e2 are formed into semispherical shapes, the o makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 is the protruding parts 473el and 473e2, so the effects of the surface tension reduced
Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravit than that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step in the amount of remaining ink, balance part 471 moves in the di bottom part of frame part 110 (direction of the bottom part of ink rese 111, downward in Figures 14(a) and 14(b)) in step with this drop surface I of the ink When balance part 471 moves in the direction part, and arm part 473 moves in the direction of the top part using att 472 as a rotational axis, shielding arm part 473c deviates from the ra detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 and thereby the state i depleted can be detected
With a conventional balance part, the inside of the balance part was hollo make the balance part float on liquid surface I of the ink, but with this co working (or molding) of the balance part becomes difficult In contrast t embodiment, the materials of sensor arm 470 consist of mateπals with specific g
Figure 20(c) is a cross sectional view through line XXc XXc in Figure
As illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 20(b), ink supply part 12 intake part 130, and detection part 140 are provided on one of the s frame part 110 (one end surface, the side surface in the fron installation when ink cartridge 14 is installed) As described abov illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 20(b) is the position in which ink c installed inside accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 (s Therefore, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed inside ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, and ink supply sequentially aligned from top (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom o In other words, the elements are aligned in the height direction (Y di cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figure 2θ(a), width t5 of detection part 140 is for it is shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (o supply cap 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustr 20(b), detection part 140 is formed such that it is concave in the dire part 110 (in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir cha respect to ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
As described above, arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned o detection part 140 As will be described below, the light path of r detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) is opened from the light blocking st rotation of arm part 473, and the amount of remaining ink can be result On remaining ink detection sensor 57, light receiving part emitting part 57a are positioned on both sides of detection part 140 right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side surfaces of detection part 14 the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and back side surfaces i form detection surfaces 140a and 140b As is clear from Figure 20(a), t surfaces 140a and 140b are arallel to the hei ht direction (Y dir
from ink supply part 120 at this time and adheres to detection pat 1 when ink cartridge 144 is temporarily removed from refill unit 13, in to needle 49 of multifunction device 1 is likely to adhere to the opening of ink supply part 120, but after it is removed, the ink that vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 120 sometimes adheres to 140 depending on the position in which the user handles ink cartridge cartridge 14 is once again installed in refill unit 13 in the state in adhered to detection part 140, because ink detection part 140 (dete 140a and 140b) and light receiving part 57b and light emitting remaining ink detection sensor 57 are in close proximity in the inst described above, there is a risk that the ink that has adhered to dete will transfer to light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a of detection sensor 57 In this way, ink that adheres to remaining ink de 57 blocks light and therefore deteriorates the sensitivity of remaining sensor 57 This deterioration of sensitivity is even more promi cartridges tha^ use pigmented ink
In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 20(b), detection part 1 in a position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with supply part 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adher part 140 even if ink drips from ink supply part 120 In other words maintains ink cartridge 14 in a position in which ink supply part 120 detection part 140 and the end surface of ink supply part 120 (end sur opening 600a of supply cap 600 is formed) is vertical, ink that has a vicinity of the opening of ink supply part 120 is most susceptible to gravity and likely to drop but because detection part 140 is withdraw ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink supply part 120, the i does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adhere to 140
Further, as illustrated in Figure 20(c) side walls that form detect and 140b from the side surface of frame part 110 are formed on dete Therefore edge part 140c where the side surface of frame part 110 surfaces 140a and 140b intersect is formed at a roughly perpendicula ink adheres to the vicinity of edge 140c, the capillary force of edge 1 the ink because edge 140c is formed at a roughly perpendicular angle, likely to flow to the side of ink supply part 120 through edge 140c possible to reduce the adherence of ink to detection surfaces 140a and
Next, the configuration of the parts of ink reservoir elemen described with reference to Figure 21 Figure 21 is an exploded fro reservoir element 100
As illustrated in Figure 21, ink reservoir element 100 is primaril into four elements The four parts are frame part 110, ink supply m which constitutes ink supply part 120 ambient air intake mechanis constitutes ambient air intake part 130, and ink dispensing plug pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing part 150 (s Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of an elastic member such as Pul once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part 451, it cannot be easily even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is configured such that t needle is blocked
Ink supply element 116 which is formed in a roughly cylindric which a portion of ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted, and ambi element 117 which is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape in whic ambient air intake mechanism 510 is inserted, are formed as a unit 110 Further, protruding parts 116a and 116b (protruding part illustrated in the figure), which protrude in the direction of the outer of ink supply element 116 in order to fasten ink supply mecha symmetrically arranged on ink supply element 116 centered on the
Figure 21) Protruding parts 116a 116b, 117a, and 117b are formed end surface on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 protrudes in a di perpendicular to the outer circumferential surface of ink supply elem outer circumferential surface of ambient air intake element 117 (Z they slope from this protruding edge part towards the outer circumfe of ink supply element 116 or the outer circumference part of ambi element 117 In other words, when ink supply mechanism 500 an intake mechanism 510 are attached to ink supply element 116 an intake element 117, the easy desorption of ink supply mechanism 50 air intake mechanism 510 can be prevented
Next, the components of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambi mechanism 510 will be described with reference to Figures 22 through is an exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambie mechanism 510 Figure 22(a) is an exploded view of ink supply mecha Figure 22(b) is an exploded view of ambient air intake mechanism 51
As illustrated in Figure 22(a) ink supply mechanism 500 is e supply cap 600, which is installed on ink supply element 116, sup which is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber into which Figure 2) of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is inserted, sup which blocks the flow path of ink when this supply joint 610 and th make contact, first supply spring 630 which is housed inside this su and is made of a resinous elastic material, supply slider 640, which co surface of supply valve 620 and can be operated in a uniaxial directio movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into needle 4 arrow Ol in Figure 22(a) hereafter called the axial direction Ol mechanism 500"» regarding this direction as is clear from Figure 1 mechanism 50 becomes parallel to the X direction when ink cartridge second supply spring 650, which is housed inside this supply slid
with ambient air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intake ambient air joint 710, which is made of an elastic resin material s ambient air valve 720, which blocks the flow path of ink when this am 710 and the bottom wall make contact and makes contact with b multifunction device 1 (see Figure 5) and opens the flow path (passa air when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (refi Figure l), first ambient air spring 730, which is housed inside this am 720 and is made of a resinous elastic material, ambient air slider 740, the open surface of ambient air valve 720 and can be operated direction, which is the movement direction of ambient air valve 720 t (direction of arrow 02 in Figure 22(b) hereafter called the "axial d ambient air supply mechanism 510", as is clear from Figure 14, ambi 510 becomes parallel to the X direction when ink cartridge 14 is loade ambient air spring 750, which is housed inside this ambient air slid formed with the same material and into the same shape as those of fir spring 730 Ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring 730 amb 740, and second ambient air spring 750 constitute ambient air valve m that actually operates
Below supply cap 600, supply joint 610, supply valve 620 firs supply springs 630 and 650, supply slider 640, valve seat 660, che cover 680 ambient air cap 700, ambient air joint 710, ambient air v and second ambient air springs 730 and 750, and ambient air slide described with reference to Figures 23 through 33
Figure 23 is a diagram that shows supply cap 600 Figure 23(a) that shows a side view of supply cap 600, Figure 23(b) is a diagram side view of supply cap 600 from the perspective of arrow XXIIIb in Figure 23(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply cap 600, Fi dia ram that shows a bottom view of su l ca 600, and Fi u
dripping to the outside of ink cartridge 14
Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engageme which are formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to t vicinity of the top (vicinity of the upper side end in Figure 23(a)) an protruding parts 116a and 116b (see Figure 21) of ink supply elem supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21), supply securing part 601
As illustrated in Figure 23(b), a pair of supply cap cutout parts 6 (see Figure 23(c) for supply cap cutout part 604b) which are formed line that is roughly orthogonal to the straight line that connects eng 603a and 603b (positions moved approximately 90° with respect to a of ink supply mechanism 500) and are cut out facing the direction part 602 from the top surface of supply securing part 601 (upper e Figure 23(b)), are formed on supply securing part 601
As illustrated in the front view in Figure 23(c) and in the bottom 23(d), insertion hole 605, into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inser below) is formed in roughly the center position of ink storage part 602
600 As illustrated in Figure 23(c), the region from the circle that fo hole 605 to the circle one step outward is first upper wall 606a, wh upper end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region from the circ side that forms first upper wall 606a to the circle one step outward i 606b which forms a sloping surface that slopes downward in the di bottom surface of ink storage part 602 The region from the circle of that forms this sloping wall 606b to the circle one step outward is lo which forms the lower end surface of ink storage part 602, and the re circle of the outer side that forms lower wall 606c to the circle one st second upper wall 606d, which forms the lower end surface of supply
601 and forms the upper end surface of ink storage part 602 The part
needle 49 is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross se Figure 23(e) such that it decreases in diameter towards insertion h maximum diameter of that of opening 600a, which forms the final exit a result, the inner circumferential surface on the side of axial center wall 606b becomes the insertion path into which needle 49 (see Figure The space of range t7 illustrated in Figures 23(c) and 23(c) (in oth space formed by sloping wall 606b, lower wall 606c, and outer circu 606e) forms ink storing part 607, in which ink can be stored (accumul
When supply cap 600 is attached to ink supply element 116 (s protruding parts 116a and 116b of ink supply element 116 protrud circumferential direction, so supply cap 600 is attached as it increas m the outer circumferential direction Because supply cap cutout p 604b are formed, the diameter of supply cap 600 increases in the dire engagement parts 603a and 603b move away from one another Th supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attached without ap pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency w damage to supply cap 600
Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610 Figure 24(a) that shows a side view of supply joint 610, Figure 24(b) is a diagram plan view of supply joint 610, Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a supply joint 610 and Figure 24(d) is a cross sectional view of sup through line XXIVd XXIVd in Figure 24(b)
As illustrated in Figure 24(a), supply joint 610 is formed in three side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular t Figure 24(a)) The part illustrated in the bottommost step (lower s 24(a)) is joint outer circumference part 611, which is the part that with second upper wall 606d of ink storage part 602 of supply cap 6 23) and the inner circumferential surface of supply securing part 601
joint inner circumference part 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a) Fu illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 612 is joi 613, which makes contact with supply valve 620 (see Figure 25) Sup made of an elastic material such as a resin rubber
As illustrated in Figure 24(b), the axial center of supply joint 61 on axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, and joint contact inner circumference part 612, and joint outer circumference part ar formed towards the outer circumferential direction from this axial ce
As illustrated in Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 projects fro 612a of joint inner circumference part 612 (surface on the side that with supply valve 620) Joint contact part 613 is formed such that it n tip 613a (upper end part in Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes co bottom surface of supply valve 620 and blocks the flow path of the ink protruding part 614, which protrudes from the inner circumferential s axial center 01, opening 612c, which forms the insertion opening of Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumfer (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insertion passage 612d, w between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, are formed circumference part 612 As illustrated in Figure 24(c), the portio passage 612d that is^ formed in a stepped shape is formed with roug spacing from axial center Ol in the outer circumferential dir circumferential surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 is provided direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, and steppe is provided in a direction that is orthogonal to the direction of axial ce
As illustrated in Figure 24(d), ink flow path 615, which passes bottom surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613a o part 613 (from the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)), is for oint 610 This ink flow ath 615 consists of o ening 612c, which
The lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a steppe direction of axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path in a tapered shape towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, path 615a is formed in a stepped shape such that the diameter gradu from opening 612c towards the contact surface with inner circumfer 614a of joint protruding part 614 The lower part of step part flow formed in a stepped shape, so even if needle 49 (see Figure 2) is r minute quantity of ink flows through ink flow path 615, the ink i capillary force due to the angular part of this step part so it is possi ink from dripping to the outside of supply joint 610 When needle 49 is dripping of ink can be likewise prevented, even if ink drips into ink from the tip of needle 49 In this embodiment, supply cap 600 is equi storage part 602, so the portion of the lower half of step part flow pat formed in a stepped shape may alternatively be formed in a tapered s
Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smalle ink flow path ,615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindric inside diameter of this protruding part flow path 615b is formed s slightly smaller than the diameter of needle 49 (see Figure 2) Con path 615c is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape havi diameter that is larger than that of protruding part flow path 615b, a diameter is sufficiently larger than the diameter of needle 49 Bec surface 614b is formed on the border of protruding part flow path 615 part flow path 615c, the inside diameter in the direction of axial ce protruding part flow path 615b to contact part flow path 615c drasti As a result, as illustrated in Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 assum that is cut out into a countersunk shape by its inner circumferential and stepped surface 614b, and tip 613a of joint contact part 613 is pos periphery of this cutout part
protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that is protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, if the area of the part of su that elastically adheres to the periphery of needle 49 becomes large, when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figu large, and smooth installation thus becomes impossible How embodiment, a configuration that establishes joint protruding part 6 contact with needle 49 only on the inner circumferential surface 614 it is possible to reduce the surface of contact with needle 49 and to s the cartridge in multifunction device 1 Moreover needle 49 is inserte path 615, so the flow path through which ink actually flows becomes needle 49 Further, because contact part flow path 615c is fo countersunk shape, the displacement of supply joint 610 in the dire center Ol when needle 49 is inserted can be reduced
Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620 Figure 25(a) that shows a side view of supply valve 620, Figure 25(b) is a diagram side view of supply valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb in Figure 25(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of supply valve 620, a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply valve 620, and Fig cross sectional view of supply valve 620 through line XXVe XXVe in Fi
As illustrated in Figure 25(a), supply valve 620 is equipped with wall 621 which forms the bottom surface of supply valve 620 (lower s Figure 25(a)) and valve outer circumferential wall 622, which is provi direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure valve bottom wall 621
A pair of valve guide grooves 623, into which slider loose insertio supply slider 640 (see Figure 27) is loosely inserted, is formed o circumferential wall 622 As illustrated in Figure 25(c), the pair o grooves 623 is symmetrically formed with respect to axial center Ol
from valve guide grooves 623 can be prevented
Moreover, a pair of valve constraining parts 625, which project i direction as valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of suppl connected to valve outer circumferential wall 622 Each of the valv parts 625 is equipped with valve hook part 626, which projects towar Ol from its tip (tip of the upper side portion in Figure 25(a)) and supply slider 640
Further, four valve protruding parts 622a, which protrude i shapes in the outer circumferential direction and are formed from bottom of valve outer circumferential wall 622, are formed on circumferential wall 622 with equal spacing along valve outer circu 622 These valve protruding parts 622a are provided in order to smo the operations of supply valve 620 when supply valve 620 is inserted i element 116 (see Figure 21) When there are no valve protruding p inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contac ink supply element 116 becomes large, and the resistance at the tim also becomes large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 62 semicircular shapes are provided, only valve protruding parts 622a with the inner circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and of supply valve 620 inside ink supply element 116 become smooth
Valve constraining parts 625 and valve projecting wall are for they extend upward from valve outer circumferential wall 622 As misalignment of supply slider 640 in the direction orthogonal to th axial center Ol can be prevented Further, the operation of supply sli direction of axial center Ol is restricted by valve constraining par supply spring 630 can be reliably housed and operated As illustrat 25(c) four ink flow paths 627, which communicate in the vertical dir
arranged in parallel on valve bottom wall 621 As illustrated in Fig height of valve bearing part 628 in the direction of axial center Ol i that it is substantially lower than valve outer circumferential w bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sprin make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 6 in the space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is be supply spring 630 makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the in blocked and ink no longer flows Therefore, valve bearing part 628 order to secure the ink flow path, and the part is acceptable as long spring 630 does not make contact with valve bottom wall 621, so it is minimum required height and this prevents increases in the scale of direction of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500
Valve inner circumferential wall 629 which is formed in a roughl that covers the outer circumferential surface of spring top part 632 spring 630, is provided on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and o ink flow path 627 This valve inner circumferential wall 629 is provid restrict the movement of first supply spring 630 in a direction that is axial center 01, and first supply spring 630 is accurately bent in th axial center Ol by restricting the movement of first supply spring 630 that is orthogonal to axial center Ol
Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply spring 630 Fig diagram that shows a side view of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(b that shows a plan view of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(c) is a shows a bottom view of first supply spring 630, and Figure 26(d) is a c view of first supply spring 630 through line XXVId XXVTd in Figure 2
First supply spring 630 is formed in a roughly reversed bowl shape hollow cone), and it is primarily equipped with ring shaped spring bot which forms the bottom surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the
biased direction of first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 6 part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of supply v Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 i of supply joint 610 (see Figure 24) The diameter of spring bottom part such that it is larger than the diameter of spring top part 632, so spri
631 forms the base when spring plastic part 633 is elastically deforme
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), ink flow path 634 which communi tip of spring top part 632 (right end surface in Figure 26(d)) to the bot spring bottom part 631 (left end surface in Figure 26(d)), is formed o spring 630 This ink flow path 634 consists of top part flow path 6 demarcated by the inner circumferential surface of spring top part 63 flow path 634b, which is demarcated by the inner circumferential su plastic part 633 and bottom part flow path 634c, which is demarcate circumferential surface of spring bottom part 631 As illustrated in Fi area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually increases f spring top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part as illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of s
632 is formed in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction to the page When spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed i reversed bowl shape that is convex on the side moving away from ax spring plastic part 633 can be more easily deformed than in the case i plastic part 633 is a roughly conic shape
The cross sectional shape of top part flow path 634a of spring top also be formed into a roughly quadrilateral shape When the openi path 634a is formed into a roughly quadrilateral shape, the effects contained in the ink can be reduced Here, the air bubbles contained spherical so when the flow path is blocked by air bubbles that grow l inside diameter of top part flow path 634a, the ink flow path ( assa e)
quadrilateral, and it may alternatively be formed into a polygo hexahedron or a star shape As in this embodiment even if it is circu formed with a diameter with which the effects of air bubbles would be
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), spring top part 632 is formed int thick cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center formed such that the cross sectional shape perpendicular to the dire center Ol (biased direction of first supply spring 630) is uniform Si bottom part 631 is also formed into a relatively thick cylindrical shap in the direction of axial center 01, and it is formed such that the c shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center 01 is uniform
As illustrated in Figure 26(d) spring plastic part 633 is formed i reversed bowl shape (or roughly conical shape) that curves (or prescribed angle in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, the respect to loading in the direction of axial center Ol become weak in spring bottom part 631 and spring top part 632 Furthermore, sprin 633 is formed such that it has a thinner profile than spring bottom spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength Accordingly, whe spring 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically deforms
Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that spring 630, and the composition of second supply spring 650 cons bottom part 651, spring top part 652, spring plastic part 653, and ink (top part flow path 654a, plastic part flow path 654b, and bottom p 654c) Further, first ambient air spring 730 and second supply sprin formed with the same shape as that of first supply spring 630, and the consist of spring bottom parts 731 and 751, spring top parts 732 an plastic parts 733 and 753, ink flow paths 734 and 754 (top part flow p 754a, plastic part flow paths 734b and 754b, and bottom part flow p 754c)
Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a hig hardness than first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) and second supp and it is primarily equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 64 the outer periphery of supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting w 642b, which project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 in of axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose i
643, which extend from slider outer circumferential wall 641 to th slider projecting wall 642a (upper side end in Figure 27(a)) and are lo into valve guide grooves 623 of supply valve 620 (see Figure 25), slider
644, either side on which first and second supply springs 630 and 650 which is formed on the inside of slider outer circumferential wall 6 contact with spring bottom parts 631 and 651 of first and second sp 650, and slider through hole 645, which is formed in the center pos platform part 644 and connects the top and bottom of slider platform clear from Figure 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and 642b a [symmetrically] such that they sandwich axial center 01, and the pair insertion parts 643 is also positioned [symmetrically] such that they s center Ol
The inside diameter of slider outer circumferential wall 641 is for it is roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 6 first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting w 642b are formed such that they project from this slider outer circum 641 in the direction of axial center 01, so when first and second suppl and 650 are arranged, the movement of first and second springs 630 a direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted As a result fir springs 630 and 650 are elastically deformed in the direction of axial c
Slider loose insertion parts 643 are formed such that they e direction of axial center Ol of supply slider 640 (formed across
seat 660, and Figure 28(d) is a cross sectional view of valve seat 66 XXVIIId XXVIIId in Figure 28(b)
As illustrated in Figure 28(a), valve seat 660 is equipped with val part 661, which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and with spring top part 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat 662, which are placed on the top surface of this valve seat bottom p side in Figure 28(a)) Each valve seat bearing part 662 is equipped sloping surface 662a, which slopes downward as it approaches the c seat 660, and check valve 670, which will be described below is re valve seat sloping surface 662a
As illustrated in Figure 28(b), six valve seat bearing parts 662 ar prescribed spacing in the circumferential direction of valve seat 66 seat through holes 662b, which pass through the front and back of v are formed on three of the six valve seat bearing parts These fi through holes 662b are formed on a portion other than valve seat s 662a of valve ,seat bearing part 662 (horizontal portion of valve sea 662) Therefore, because first valve seat through holes 662b are forme that differs from the portion that receives check valve 670, the block flow path can be prevented
Moreover, second valve seat through holes 663, which pass thro bottom part 661 are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of v Six of these second valve seat through holes 663 are formed symmetry based on the center line (center line Q illustrated in Fi passes through axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 28(b) This second valve seat through holes 663 form an i through which ink flows
As illustrated in Figure 28(c), concave valve seat communicatin which connect each of the second valve seat throu h holes 663 are
projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumfer of spring top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
As illustrated in Figure 28(d) a gap is formed between valve surface 662a of valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat 663 in the direction of axial center Ol As a result, even if check supported on valve seat sloping surface 662a, the flow path of the i Moreover even if the end surface of spring top part 632 of second sup makes contact with the bottom surfaces of second valve seat thro second valve seat through holes 663 are positioned to the outside circumference of valve seat projecting part 664 (virtual line R in Fi the flow path of the ink is secured by valve seat communicating groo seat communicating grooves 664 connect all of the second valve seat 663, so even if there are second valve seat through holes 663 that a valve seat projecting part 665, the ink flow path can be reliably secur
Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670 Figure 29(a) is a shows a side view of check valve 670, Figure 29(b) is a diagram that view of check valve 670, Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom valve 670, and Figure 29(c) is a cross sectional view of check valve 67 XXIXd XXIXd in Figure 29(a)
Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape fro perspective (perspective in the direction perpendicular to the page in and it consists of umbrella part 671 and shaft part 672 Umbrella p the flow path of the ink by making contact with cover 680 (see Figur illustrated in Figures 29(b) and 29(d), it is equipped with linking part connected to shaft part 672, and wing part 671b, which extends roug in the outer circumferential direction from this linking part 671a and i a thin profile As a result, when it makes contact with cover 680, wi
path of the ink is blocked in the state in which umbrella part 671 of c makes contact with cover 680
Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover throug Figure 30) of cover 680, which will be described below This sha positioned in the vicinity of cover 680 in the state in which it is att 680, and it has ball part 672a which is formed into a roughly spheric ball part 672a is formed with a diameter that is greater than that o through hole 684 of cover 680, and it prevents check valve 670 from f it is attached to cover 680 As a result, it is possible to reduce the loss 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operationahty is impr
Figure 30 is a diagram that shows cover 680 Figure 30(a) is a shows a side view of cover 680, Figure 30(b) is a diagram that shows cover 680 Figure 30(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of c Figure 30(d) is a cross sectional view of cover 680 through line X Figure 3θ(b)
Cover 680 is formed into a roughly cylindrical shape in which the b side (side of valve seat 660 (see Figure 28)) is opened Cover 680 is cover outer circumferential wall 681 which forms the outer periphery, part 682, which forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Fig it is formed such that the bottom surface side is opened Valve seat 66 the opening of the bottom surface of cover 680 (lower side in Figu check valve 670 is housed between valve seat 660 and cover 680 In ot space that houses check valve 670 is formed by cover 680 and valve se
As illustrated in Figures 30(b) and 30(c), six first cover through ho pass through the front and back of cover 680, are formed in the ci direction with respect to axial center Ol These first cover through ho flow path through which ink flows, and when umbrella part 671 of ch (see Fi ure 29) makes contact with cover to art 682 first cover thro
circumferential surface However when umbrella part 671 of check va contact with cover top part 682, the entire first cover through hole is ink flow path of second cover through hole 684 formed in t simultaneously blocked
Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 3l(b) that shows a side view of ambient air cap 700 from the perspective o in Figure 3l(a), Figure 3l(c) is a diagram that shows a plan view of a 700, Figure 3l(d) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient ai Figure 3l(e) is a cross sectional view of ambient air cap 700 XXXIe XXXIe in Figure 3l(c)
As illustrated in Figure 3l(a), ambient air cap 700 is equipped cylindrical ambient air securing part 701, which forms the side wall o air cap 700 and is fastened to ambient air intake element 117 (see F ambient air cap bottom wall 702, which forms the bottom wall of a 700 Engagement holes 703a and 703b (see Figure 3l(b) for engageme which are formed from the bottom part of ambient air securing part 7 in Figure 3l(a)) to the vicinity of the top part (vicinity of the end of the Figure 3l(a)) and are engaged with protruding parts 117a and 117b intake element 117 described above when ambient air cap 700 i ambient air intake element 117, are formed on ambient air securing p
As illustrated in Figure 3l(b), ambient air cap cutout parts 7 (ambient air cap cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), whi in positions moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center positions in which engagement holes 703a and 703b are formed and ar the top end of ambient air securing part 701 to the vicinity of the bo formed on ambient air securing part 701
Moreover, as illustrated in the lan view in Fi ure 3l(c) and in th
When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake protruding parts 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 p outer circumferential direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circumferent Therefore when ambient air cap 700 is to be attached it can be att applying strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installat while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b) that shows a plan view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a shows a bottom view of ambient air joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a c view of ambient air joint 710 through line XXXIId XXXIId in Figure 3
As illustrated in Figure 32(a) ambient air joint 710 is formed in f a side view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular t Figure 32 (a)) The part illustrated in the second step from the bottom Figure 32(a)) is joint outer circumference part 711, which is the pa contact with the inner circumferential surface of ambient air securing Figure 31) of ambient air cap 700 and ambient air cap bottom wall 7 the outer circumference part of ambient air joint 710 The part illustra step of this joint outer circumference part 711 is joint inner circumfer which is provided on the inside of ambient air intake element 117 (s and forms the inner circumference part of ambient air joint 710, and t joint inner circumference part 712 is illustrated in Figure 32(a) Fur illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 712 is con which makes contact with ambient air valve 720 The part illus bottommost step is joint skirt part 714 formed with a thin profil member that covers the outside surface of valve open part 721a (see ambient air valve 720 and exposes it to the outside from ambient air c
elastically deformed
As illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint contact part 713 projects fro 712a of joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that with ambient air valve 720) Joint contact part 713 is formed such t toward tip 713a (upper end part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a with the bottom surface of ambient air valve 720 and blocks the ambi path Moreover, as illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint passage 715, whic the bottom surface of joint inner circumference part 712 to tip 713a o part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32(d)), is formed on am 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 is inserted passage 715
Figure 33 is a diagram that shows ambient air valve 720 Fig diagram that shows a side view of ambient air valve 720, and Fig diagram that shows a bottom view of ambient air valve 720 Ambient has a configuration in which valve open part 721a, which projects fr surface of valve bottom wall 721 and opens the ambient air intake p contact with the side of multifunction device 1 (see Figure l) is ad valve 620 Therefore, detailed descriptions of valve bottom wall 72 circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part 722a, valve guide gro projecting wall 724 valve constraining part 725, valve hook part 72 intake path 727 (part corresponding to ink flow path 627), valve bea and valve inner circumferential wall 729 will be omitted here Illustr that cannot be visually confirmed in the side view (Figure 33(a)) an (Figure 33(b)) of ambient air valve 720 will also be omitted here
Ambient air valve 720 is equipped with valve open part 721a, from the bottom surface of valve bottom wall 721 Valve open part 721 on axial center 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 and is rough a rod shape Roughly semicircular convex part 721b, which projects fr
(tip 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an amb path
When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and 721a operates joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also mak the end surface of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, communication between the ambient air intake path and the outsi part 714 As a result, ambient air that is introduced from the side o device 1 can be introduced smoothly Moreover even if joint elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and makes contact with 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex part 721 part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake p blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservo (see Figure 14)
Next, the state in which ink supply mechanism 500 and amb mechanism 510 are installed into ink supply element 116 and amb element 117 will be described with reference to Figure 34 Figure cross sectional view that shows the state in which ink supply mech ambient air intake mechanism 510 are installed into ink supply el ambient air intake element 117
As illustrated in Figure 34, ink supply mechanism 500 is ins attached to inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply ele ambient air intake mechanism 510 is inserted into and atta circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake element 117
First, ink supply mechanism 500, which is attached to ink suppl will be described On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink suppl projecting wall 801, which projects in the direction of the i circumferential wall 800 is formed on the side of first supply comm
this valve seat 660 (left side in Figure 34), and supply slider 640 is that it houses this second supply spring 650 First supply spring 63 supply slider 640 on the opposite side of second supply spring 650, a spring 630 is arranged between supply slider 640 and supply valve supply joint 610 is arranged such that it makes contact with the bot supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to the outside element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th 610 Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts of ink supply element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supp 500 is determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial ce supply mechanism 500 is determined by supply cap 600 and stepped s inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116
The inside diameter of inner circumferential surface 800 of ink s 116 is formed such that it is slightly larger than the outside diam valve 620, and it is configured such that the operation of supply va direction of axial center Ol can be performed smoothly inside ink s 116 As described above, four valve protruding parts 622a are forme circumferential surface of supply valve 620, and it is configured contact surface with inner circumferential surface 800 is small The supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal direction with respect to a and makes contact with inner circumferential surface 800, it is possi the state in which supply valve 620 cannot be operated Moreover, a between supply valve 620 and inner circumferential surface 800, so an that passes through the inside of ink supply mechanism 500 and an that flows through the outside of supply valve 620 are formed As a circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116 is the space t ink flow path chamber
As described above, slider latform art 644 is in a state i
position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
Next, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which is attached t intake element 117 will be described On inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, protruding part 811 which pro direction of ambient air intake mechanism 510 (left direction in formed on the end surface of ambient air intake passage forming pa side of first ambient air communicating chamber This protrudin configured as a pair of plate shaped member and it makes contact surface of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 A ambient air intake path is formed between protruding part 811 and s 752 of second ambient air spring 750 Moreover, the position of ambi mechanism 510 on the side of first ambient air communicating determined as a result of second ambient air spring 750 making protruding part 811
As with the ink supply mechanism 500 side, ambient air slider 74 on ambient air intake mechanism 510 such that it houses second ambi 750, and first ambient air spring 730 is housed by ambient air slid opposite side of second ambient air spring 750, while first ambient air arranged between ambient air slider 740 and ambient air valve 7 ambient air joint 710 is arranged such that it makes contact wit surface of ambient air valve 720, and ambient air cap 700 is fastened of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the b on the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this am 710 Ambient air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding p 117b of ambient air intake element 117, so the position on the outside intake mechanism 510 is determined Therefore, the position of th axial center 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 is determined b cap 700 and protruding part 811 of inner circumferential surface 810
reference to Figures 35 through 39 Figure 35 is a diagram that manufacturing process before film 160 is welded Figure 36 is a explains the welding process of film 160 Figure 36(a) is a diagram tha welding surface of frame part 110 onto which film 160 is welded and a diagram that explains the welding process in which film 160 is we part 110 Figure 37 is a diagram that explains the manufacturing proc after film 160 is welded Figure 37(a) is a diagram that explains th process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake m are attached to frame part 110 Figure 37(b) is a diagram that decompression process, and Figure 37(c) is a diagram that expl dispensing process Figure 38 is a diagram that explains the installat case 200 Figure 38(a) is a diagram that explains the process in w sandwiches frame part 110, and Figure 38(b) is a diagram that explai process in which case 200 is welded Figure 39 is a diagram that manufacturing process performed before ink cartridge 14 is shipped a diagram that explains the process in which protector 300 is attache 39(b) is a diagram that explains the process in which ink cartridge 14 i packaging bag 930
As illustrated in Figure 35, in the manufacture of ink cartridge 1 470 is first attached to frame part 110 Frame part 110 and sensor ar molded using injection molding in a preliminary process (molding pro words, each is respectively molded in a first molding process (prepar in which frame part 110 is injection molded and in a second mo (preparatory process) in which sensor arm 470 is injection molded
In sensor arm 470, attachment shaft 472a, which is provided on att 472 of sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which the vicinity of supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (se attachment process* preparatory process) Arm sandwiching part 425
sandwiching part 425, the vertical and horizontal range of moveme arm part 473c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141d of enclosur detection part 140 In other words, once the attachment of senso complete, sensor arm 470 cannot be easily detached, so it is possible manufacturing process of ink cartridge 14 from becoming compl prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from detection part 140 cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge 14 is multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably det reliability of the product can be improved
In this embodiment, a supporting part that forms the axis operation of sensor arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (att 472a) of sensor arm 470 is supported on arm sandwiching part 425 110, but a configuration in which an attachment shaft is provided frame part 110 and a sandwiching part is provided on the side of se may also be used, and a configuration in which sensor arm 470 and f are attached using a hinge junction would also be acceptable In ot long as sensor arm 470 is attached such that it can rotate with respect 110, its attachment structure may take any form
When the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, ink dispensi then pressed inside dispensing cylinder part 451 of ink dispensing dispensing plug 520 pressing process, preparatory process) Ink dispe is pressed such that outside end surface 520a of ink dispensing p roughly the same plane as the outside surface of frame part 110, pressed to a position such that it makes contact with bottom part 451b cylinder part 451 This is because, as described above, firs communicating hole 452 of dispensing passage forming part 450 is side surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, and when ink dispensi ressed to the back of dis ensin c linder art 451, first dis ensin c
film 160 is welded to first opening 112a (preparatory process), and a se process in which film 160 is welded to second opening 112b
As illustrated in Figure 36(b), film 160 is cut such that it is la external outline of frame part 110, and it covers frame part 110 At t 160 is arranged on first opening 112a and second opening 112b witho aspirating film 160 with an aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) fr frame part 110 Ultrasound welded surface 900 of an ultrasonic weldi illustrated in the figure) is then placed on film 160 such that it co circumference parts of first and second openings 112a and circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of film 160, a welded to frame part 110 When film 160 is welded to each welded p painted black in Figure 37(a) (outer circumference welded parts 400a inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b) are
On frame part 110, multiple inner circumference welded parts 411 411b to 417b are dispersed on the inner circumferential side of outer welded parts 400a and 400b, so if ultrasonic welding is performed wit of the welded parts, the structure of ultrasound welded surface complex, and the manufacturing cost therefore increases How embodiment, ultrasound welded surface 900 of the ultrasonic wel configured such that it covers all of the welded parts (outer circumf parts and inner circumference welded parts), so it is possible to redu.c the manufacturing cost of the welding process of film 160
Moreover, film 160 is made of a double layered film comprising a a polyethylene film (called "nylon polyethylene" hereafter) and the si contact with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film later This nylon completely blocks liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a sm gas circulation is possible between ink reservoir chamber 111 whi sealed by film 160, and packaging bag 930 (see Figure 39(b)),
film are formed into two layers or a film formed by mixing nylon an or nylon and polypropylene could be used
Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is ma type of substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 160 and frame part 110 are formed from the same material both fil welded parts can be fused and welded reliably at the time of ultraso this embodiment film 160 has a double layer structure Nylon films polyethylene films from the perspective of strength, but their melting so they are deficient from the perspective of welding operationally T film 160 is formed with a double layer structure made of nylon and the strength is secured, and by using the polyethylene layer as the welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low heating so welding operationally is secured Furthermore, the nylon layer do the welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of vicinity of the welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity parts can also be maintained
As illustrated in Figure 37(a), when the welding of film 160 is supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 ar frame part 110 Ink supply mechanism 500 is attached to ink suppl (ink supply mechanism 500 attachment process, preparatory process) air intake mechanism 510 is attached to ambient air intake element air intake mechanism [500] attachment process? preparatory pr attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 (attachment process), a which cover 680 check valve 670, and valve seat 660 are formed inserted inside ink supply element 116 (position that makes contact surface 801a) At this time, the tip of check valve 670 is inserted in communicating hole 421 (see Figure 34), and it is attached such that i the s ace enclosed b supply artition wall 422 A component in whic
circumference part 612 is pressed inside inner circumferential surf supply element 116, and joint outer circumference part 611 is sandw ink supply element 116 and supply cap 600 When the attachment of s to ink supply element 116 is complete, the attachment of ink supply m is complete, and ink supply part 120 is constructed
As with the attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 to ink suppl the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air i 117 (attachment process) is performed in a process in which a compo ambient air joint 710 ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a u air cap 700 is inserted inside inner circumferential surface 810 o intake element 117, and ambient air cap 700 is fixed to the outer ci surface of ambient air intake element 117 At this time, ambient pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117, and engageme and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding parts of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710 circumference part 712 is pressed inside inner circumferential s ambient air intake element 117, and joint outer circumference sandwiched between ambient air intake element 117 and ambient When the attachment of ambient air cap 700 to ambient air intake e complete the attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 is ambient air intake part 130 is completed
As illustrated in Figure 37(b), when the attachment of ink supp 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 to supply element 116 an intake element 117 (each attachment process) is complete, a decompr in which the inside of frame part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 111) is de performed In this embodiment, the decompression of the inside of fra performed from the side of ink supply part 120 In the decompression o
supply part 120 When suction tube 911 is removed from ink supply pa valve 620 makes contact with joint contact part 613 of supply joint 6 elastic force of first and second supply springs 630 and 650, and the fl ink is thus blocked, so the decompressed state is maintained
As illustrated in Figure 37(c), when the decompression inside fra complete after the decompression process ink dispensing needle 920 i ink dispensing plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 chamber 111) (ink dispensing process) The inside of ink reservoir c depressuπzed, so the ink is swiftly dispensed into ink reservoir cha when a prescribed amount of ink has been dispensed, dispensing removed and the ink dispensing process is completed The air press reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is air pressure pi (fi Moreover, "a prescribed amount of ink refers to the quantity for surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating third ambient air communicating hole 436 of ambient air communic forming part 430, as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when ink the penetration of ink into ambient air connection passage 433 can be purpose for not dispensing ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 u space is left inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is to, as described abov damage or deformation of film 160 Moreover, the region below liqui the ink illustrated in Figure 37(c) is the ink space where ink is stored, above liquid surface I of the ink and the space containing communicating passage forming part 430 is the ambient air commu (decompressed space), but the ink space and the ambient air commu change in shape and size depending on the state in which ink cartridg and the amount of remaining ink
Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoir c decompressed by pressure reducing device 910 so even after the dispe
the air pressure to a level within the prescribed range (in order to co air pressure is withm the prescribed range)
Here, although it is not illustrated in the figures, the subsequent process that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be d subsequent decompression process is performed using ink dispensin which was inserted into ink dispensing plug 520 In other words, a that supplies ink (not illustrated in the figure) and a pressure reduci reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambient air inside frame illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing needle 920, ink is completely dispensed the flow path is switched and decompr pressure reducing device is begun The air pressure p3 (third pressu reservoir chamber 111 after subsequent decompression is performed the air pressure pi inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the ink Therefore, the quantity of gas inside ink reservoir chamber 111 furthe a result of the subsequent decompression process, so the generation inside the ink can be prevented, and the deterioration of printing qua bubbles can be avoided Moreover, the ink that flows in at the ti dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink reservoir so air bubbles are more likely to generate but the air bubbles generate can be removed Further the device may also be configured decompression needle (not illustrated in the figure) for performin decompression is provided separately from ink dispensing nee decompression is performed by inserting the decompression needle a ink dispensing needle 920
As illustrated in Figure 17, in dispensing passage forming part 45 of second dispensing communicating hole 454 is positioned above liqu the ink (top of Figure 17(a)) so even if subsequent decompression is p a ressure reducin device the ink is never as irated to the outsid
pressed to bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451, fir communicating hole 452 is blocked by the outer circumferential s dispensing plug 520, so even if the dispensing needle is mistakenly again, the ink is not dispensed In other words, in the manufacturing cartridge 14, it is possible to prevent the dispensing process from bei twice and to prevent the occurrence of defective products
As illustrated in Figure 38(a), when the dispensing (or decompress is complete, the manufacture of ink reservoir element 110 is complet 200 is then assembled (case 200 assembly process) Case 200 (first an members 210 and 220) is molded by injection molding, and it is ma advance (third molding process)
As described above, in the assembly of cover 200, rod members 215a to 2 member 210 are inserted mto three through holes 460a to 460c (see Figure 14 f 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumference part of frame p reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member 210 At this tune 120 (supply cap 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambient air cap 700) engaged with case cutout parts 211 and 212, and the outer wall of ink supply circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of ambient air int (outer circumferential surface of ambient air cap 700) make contact with conta and 212a Second case member 220 is then attached such that case fitting hol 225c (not illustrated in the figure) of second case member 220 engage with rod to 215c of first case member 210 At this tune, ink supply part 120 (suppl ambient air intake part 130 (ambient air cap 700) are respectively engaged parts 221 and 222 of second case member 220, and the outer wall of ink supply circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of ambient air inta (outer circumference of ambient air cap 700) make contact with contact grooves
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), when the assembly of first and sec and 220 (assembly process) is complete first and second case member
as the parts are welded such that case 200 does not peel during trans does not easily peel due to human actions, any welding range or w may be used
In this embodiment, first and second case members 210 and 220 after the ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first an members 210 and 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultraso absorbed by the ink Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations welded parts of frame part 110 or film 160 are damaged or film 160 pe of vibration accompanying the welding of case 200 Moreover, whe parts of first and second case members 210 and 220 are partiall generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding is reduced, so the d part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), case projecting parts 214a an projecting part 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecti and 224b (case projecting part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) pr from ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 Theref cartridge 14 is to be installed in lnkjet recording device 1, even if ink c dropped, case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b make im ground, so the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake be prevented Further, the opening of the ambient air intake path or t path can also be prevented, so the leakage of ink can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 39(a), when the welding process of case 20 protector 300 is attached to case 200 (protector 300 attachment protector 300 is removed when ink cartridge 14 is attached to multifun (see Figure l), so it is configured such that it can be freely attached As described above, protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 30 through holes formed by case projecting cutout parts 214a and 224a of first and second case members 210 and 220 and through holes fo
930 is then decompressed by pressure reducing device 940 (pack packaging space decompression process) Packaging bag 930 is a bag one open end (end of the right front side of Figure 39(b)), and in process all of the other opened portions excluding opening 931 are welded in a state in which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed Suction tube 9 reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931, and the amb of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction p The air pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is a than the ambient pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes a (second pressure) which is lower than air pressure p3 that is redu reservoir chamber 111 (or air pressure pi when a subsequent decompr is not performed) When decompression by pressure reducing device 9 suction tube 941 is removed and opening 931 is welded, resulting in a ink cartridge 14 can be shipped The relationship between air pressu the relationship p2 < p3 < pi
Because the air pressure inside packaging bag 930 is made lowe pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 as a result of the pa decompression process, film 160 of ink cartridge 14 can be plasticall the side of packaging bag 930 (side of case 200) If the air pressure ins bag 930 is higher than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber sometimes hardens and loses flexibility, , or is damaged in the state inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed when ink cartr without being used for a long period of time When film 160 loses shape of ink reservoir chamber 111 do not change, and the air pres nonuniform, so ink cannot be accurately supplied Moreover, whe damaged, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows to the cartridge 14 However, in this embodiment, the inside of packagi decom ressed such that the air ressure is lower than the air ress
chamber 111 (there is a slight amount of gas that remains due to t decompression process implemented previously) can be gradually mov reservoir chamber 111 This is because as described above, film 160 i nylon polyethylene, which is relatively gas permeable, so the air p space inside ink reservoir chamber 111 and the air pressure of th packaging bag 930 and outside ink reservoir chamber 111 attempt t the equilibrium state, and the gas therefore moves to the outside fr reservoir chamber 111 Accordingly the deaeration of the ink stored i chamber 111 is promoted, and it becomes more difficult for air bubble so the printing quality can be favorably maintained
In this embodiment, ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging decompressed in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 2 makes direct contact with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink suppl packaging bag 930 deforms due to decompression Valve open part 72 the outside of ambient air intake part 130, so if packaging bag 930 contact with valve open part 721a, valve open part 721a operates an air intake path is sometimes opened If the ambient air intake path ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out Moreover, ambient a 130 and ink supply part 120 are sometimes damaged in step with the packaging bag 930 However, in this embodiment, protector 300 is at 200, so the damage of ambient air intake part 130 and ink supply p prevented and the opening of the ambient air intake path can be prev
As described above, ink cartridge 14 is manufactured in a process 200 is welded over ink reservoir element 100 after ink is dispens reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110, With some conventional ink c was dispensed from outside the case after the ink reservoir elemen with the case (after the assembly of the ink cartridge is completely fi such a conventional ink cartridge, it was necessary to prepare a fra
is completely concealed by case 200 such that it cannot be seen from problems in which ink spills outside as a result of the user accident ink dispensing plug 520 can be prevented
Next, the installation method of ink cartridge 14 into multifunctio be described with reference to Figure 40 Figure 40 is a diagram t method in which ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction devic
When ink cartridge 14 is to be attached to multifunction device 1, 930 is first broken, and ink cartridge 14 is removed from the inside of 930 Then protector 300 is removed from case 200 The direction in cartridge 14 (for color, for black, and for large capacity black) is multifunction device 1 is the same
First, the internal structure of refill unit 13 of multifunction de described with reference to Figure 40(a) In refill unit 13, as described 49 is provided at a lower portion of the side of back surface 56 of case 49 projects along installation direction F (arrow F in Figure 40(a)) o 14 As is clear from Figure 40(c), this installation direction F is p longitudinal direction (direction of arrow B, X direction) of ink cartri is installed into refill unit 13 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is p needle 49 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is roughly formed int horseshoe shape, and the open end of the horseshoe shape is light emi which emits light, while the other end is light receiving part 57b (not the figure), which receives light This light emitting part 57a and l part 57b are respectively inserted into through holes formed by cas 213 and 223 and detection part 140, and are attached such that the back surface 56 Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured suc not output (or outputs) a signal to a control unit provided on multifun when light receiving part 57b receives light that is emitted from light 57a and out uts (or does not out ut) a si nal to the control device whe
Moreover, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1, ink supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambient air in are sequentially arranged from bottom to top, and ink supply part part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are formed on a single end clear from Figure 40(b), this single end surface is the one side surfa positioned in the front in installation direction F when ink cartridg regular installation position Therefore, because ink supply part 120, 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such that the (located close to each other) on a single end surface, remaining ink de 57, needle 49 and passage 54, which are required on the side of device 1, can be consolidated (located close to each other) onto a single surface 56) If ink supply part 120 were provided on the bottom s cartridge 14 and detection part 140 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surface of ink cartridge 14, it would become necessar needle 49 on the bottom surface side of case 40 of refill unit 13 remaining ink detection sensor 57 and passage 54 on the side of th (back surface 56) of case 40, and the scale of multifunction device 1 w as these were provided, being diversified (located relatively far aw other) However, in this embodiment, these parts are consolidated (lo each other), so the scale of multifunction device 1 can be reduced
Ink supply part 120 and detection part 140 are sequentially pr single end surface from top to bottom, and by usingsensor arm 470 remaining ink, the full use of the ink can be improved This is due to reasons
When the amount of remaining ink is detected by irradiating a por cartridge (corresponding to detection part 140 in this embodim photodetector (corresponding to remaining ink detection sensor embodiment), if a method in which the presence of ink is detected dir
becomes relatively high, so ink that is stored below the ink supply over, and the consumption efficiency thus diminishes With a configur the irradiated part is positioned above the ink supply opening, the irradiated part becomes relatively high, so a significant quantity of when the photodetector detects the absence of ink, and when the use the absence of ink based on the detection results of the photodetector, ink that is left over becomes large However, in this embodiment, sen used, so even if the irradiated part is provided in a relatively hig absence of ink can be detected in step with the timing in which the ac remaining ink becomes low and the ink supply opening is provided in so there is little leftover ink (The description is given out of place, b ink detection method using sensor arm 470 will be described in detail
As long as the configuration of the ink cartridge is such that t opening is provided on the bottom surface of the ink cartridge and part is provided on the side surface of the ink cartridge, ink will be ful a method that directly detects the presence of ink is used Howeve there is the separate problem that multifunction device 1 increases i words, only with the invention described in this embodiment can both of the scale of multifunction device 1 and the improvement of the ful realized
As described in Figure 40(a), ink cartridge 14 is installed in a pr case protruding parts 214a and 224a (first case welded parts 216 an 200 are inserted to slide on door main body 60, and the back surface o 14 is pushed in installation direction F until most of ink cartridge 14 i refill umt 13 Moreover, as described above, sloping surfaces 214a2 formed on case projecting parts 214a and 224a, so ink cartridge 14 ca inserted due to these sloping surfaces 214a2 and 224a2 As illustr 40(a) a ortion of the back surface of ink cartrid e 14 is ush art 20
214b2 and 224b2, and the movement in the vertical direction is restri plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 of refill unit 13, so it is possible cartridge 14 from being inserted diagonally and prevent remaining sensor 57 and needle 49 from being damaged
When the door member 60 is rotated from the state of Figure direction of the arrow illustrated in Figure 40 (b), the pushing retaini of the door member 60 contacts the push part 200a forming a porti surface of the ink cartridge 14, pushing the ink cartridge 14 in t direction F As the door member 60 is rotated further, the door lock the door member 60 fits into the lock member fitting part 46 of the completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 (the state of Figu middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central position i direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14 The position wher retaining member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position includi point p of the ink cartridge 14 and extending below the middle poi words, the push part 200a is provided at a position above the ink su and below the ambient air intake part 130 in the vertical direct illustration and description of this will be omitted, when the state of reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b fits into the latch p 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14
Once installation of the ink cartridge 14 is completed, the needle into the ink supply part 120 and ink supply is enabled* the valve ope of the ambient air intake part 130 contacts the back surface 56 o enabling intake of ambient air, and the remaining ink detection inserted through the through hole formed by the case cutout parts 21 the detection part 140, enabling detection of the remaining quantit details of this will be described later
Furthermore since the remainin ink sensor 57 is inserted
Furthermore, since the pushing retaining member 61 is impell spring 66 as described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 cartridge 14 has been installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit force of the spring members 630, 650 730 and 750 of the ink supply m and the ambient air intake mechanism 510 act in the direction away on which needle 49 is arranged (leftward in Figure 40, in the directi the installation direction) As described above, the pushing retaining configured to have a greater elastic force than the elastic force gen spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able to stably r cartridge 14 once it has been installed Furthermore, the push part depressed by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substa middle between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air int allowing a substantially uniform elastic force to be applied to the in 120 and the ambient air intake part 130 This is because the ink c retained at three points in the installation direction of the ink cartr point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing retaining membe points at the back of the refill unit 13 (the ink supply part 120 and th intake part 130), with the imaginary line linking these three p substantially an isosceles triangle shape Thus, retaining the mk ca three points allows the ink cartridge 14 to be retained stably Furth the elastic force of the pushing retaining member 61 is used to r cartridge 14, the load on the surface of the ink cartridge 14 decreases to the case of a mechanical structure where the ink cartridge 14 engagement with its surface Thus, it becomes possible to prevent dam cartridge 14 through excessive loads being applied thereto
Furthermore, since the pushing retaining member 61 pushes belo position (midpoint p) in the height direction of the ink cartridge 14, a not needed to operate the door member 60, making it possible to sta
door member On the other hand if the push part 200a is arranged lower part of the back surface, for instance below the ink supply part will be able to close the door member with minimum force but since lower part of the ink cartridge 14 is pushed, the ink cartridge 14 m rotate and be pushed in tilted, so the needle 49 may not be inserted a the ink supply part 120 However, according to the present embodim push part 200a is arranged below the middle position of the ink cartr height direction and above the position corresponding to the ink supp large force is not required to operate the door member, making it pos install the ink cartridge at the prescribed location
Here, referring to Figure 41, the operation of the ink supply mech the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is i multifunction device 1 will be described Figure 41 is a drawing ill state with the ink cartridge 14 having been installed in the multifun Since Figure 41 is drawing for the purpose of explaining the operat supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction device 1 and the like have been om drawing
As illustrated in Figure 41, when the ink cartridge 14 is ins multifunction device 1 (inside the refill unit 13), the light emitting pa light receiving part 57b (not illustrated) of the remaining ink detect are arranged at positions sandwiching the detection part 140 The
140 consists of translucent or transparent resin material, allowing the from the light emitting part 57a of the remaining ink detection sen through the detection part 140 and be received by the light receiving p the shielding arm part 473c of the sensor arm 470 is arranged in the
141 of the detection part 140, as described above, the remaining ink q detected b the operation of this sensor arm 470 The operation of th
from the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610, forming an ink needle 49 communicates with a discharge opening (not illust multifunction device 1 via ink extraction opening 52 and ink tube 53 in the tip of the needle 49, a cutout 49a is formed for securing an in that an ink flow path is secured by the cutout 49a even if the tip of contacts the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620
Here, the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 when the su is depressed by the needle 49 will be described The first supply spri inside the supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described slightly flexed spring flexible part 633 On the other hand, there is no spring flexible part 653 of the second supply spring 650 arranged o side of the supply slider 640 from the first supply spring 630 determine the flexing order of the first and second supply springs 6 other words, the first supply spring 630 with the flexed spring fle flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that when t inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second sup flexes thereafter
Here, the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the directi comprises dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various c the more components there are, the more likely that dimensional er However since the supply slider 640 is brought into contact with t part 626 of the valve member 610, at least the error in the dimensio supply spring 630 becomes irrelevant Thus, dimensional error of t mechanism 500 is reduced and the telescoping operation of th mechanism 500 becomes more stable
Furthermore, the inside diameter of the valve outer circumferent the supply valve 620 and the outside diameter of the slider outer ci wall 641 of the supply slider 640 are formed to be substantially e
and second spring members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider 644 of the supply slider 640 Furthermore, while the external shap outer circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620 is formed sli than the inside diameter of the ink supply element 116, since the val part 622a is formed outward from the valve outer circumferential w supply valve 620, it becomes possible to prevent misalignment in t displacement when the supply valve 620 operates in the directio Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis Ol becomes m
Furthermore, when the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply depressed by the needle 49 and moves in the direction of valve seat 6 in Figure 41), accompanying this movement the first supply spring deformed so as to become compressed, whereupon the supply slider the direction of valve seat 660 (the direction opposite to the impellin the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650), and the spring undergoes flexible deformation This state is the state illustr 41
Once the ink cartridge 14 has been installed in the case 40 of the device 1, the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also u deformation, forming an ink flow path K indicated by arrow K The in is a flow path formed between the ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figu supply communicating hole 423, first supply communicating hole 4 through hole 683 (and second cover through hole 684) of cover 680, fi through hole 662b and second valve seat through hole 663 of valve s seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, ink flow path 654 of spring 650, slider through hole 645 of supply slider 640, ink flow pa supply spring member 630, first spring member 930 and valve bear and is a flow path which leads successively through the ink flow path valve 620 cutout 49a of needle 49 and the inside of needle 49 The s
needle 49 and is displaced in the direction of insertion (to the right i the needle 49 (displaced into the contact part flow path 615c) Here, th part 613 has a structure cut out into a countersunk shape, so the di the joint protruding part 614 in the direction of insertion of the ne transmitted directly to the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 In ot tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 is hardly displaced in the directio but is slightly displaced in a direction away from the needle 49 Th change of the supply joint 610 accompanying insertion of the needle 4 the joint contact parts 613 are displaced away from each other Assu contact part 613 had a shape with a gently sloping surface going f circumferential surface 614a of the joint protruding part 614 to the t joint contact part 613, as the needle 49 was inserted, the joint protru would deform so as to be displaced in the direction of insertion of the deformation of the joint protruding part 614 would be directly trans joint contact part 613, and the joint contact part 613 would be dis direction of insertion together with the joint protruding part 614 A insertion stroke of the needle 49 for forming an ink flow path betwe valve 620 and the joint contact part 613 would become longer, so would have to be made longer Furthermore, as the needle 49 beco becomes more likely to be damaged by contact with other members, a of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of axis Ol become increasing its size However, in the present embodiment, since the join 613 is displaced in a direction substantially orthogonal to the directio of the needle 49, the stroke for forming an ink flow path does not ne long Thus it becomes possible to reduce contact of the needle 4 members, reducing damage as well as reducing the size increase of t mechanism 500
When the ink cartridge 14 is removed form the multifunction
path 615b) flows toward the ink cap 600 (leftward in Figure 41) and the step part flow path 615a However, since the quantity of ink which the step part flow path 615a is minute, the ink is retained by the cap the step part of the step part flow path 615a, so that its outflow to the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced Furthermore, even if it flows out from flow path 615a, since the opening part of the ink storage part 602 of t 600 is wider than the opening 612c of the step part flow path 615a, t out flows into the ink storing part 607 of the ink supply cap 600 becomes possible to reliably prevent ink from flowing out of the ink ca
Next, the ambient air intake mechanism 510 side will be desc ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is in multifunction device 1, the valve opening part 721a of the ambient contacts the back surface 56 of the case 40, depressing the ambient air a result the ambient air valve 720 is moved away from the joint conta the ambient air joint 710, forming an ambient air intake path L as arrow L in the drawings Furthermore, when the valve opening par ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the back surface stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surfac joint skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand (o diameter As a result, it becomes tightly held against the back surfac the outside and inside of the joint skirt part 714 In the back surf inside of the joint skirt part 714, there is formed a passage 54 whic passage for taking in ambient air, which is admitted into the ink reser 111 via this passage 54
The operation of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when th valve 720 is depressed will be described The first ambient air sprin inside the ambient air valve 720 (and the ambient air slider 740) as de has a slightly flexed spring flexible part 733, while there is no flexing
intake mechanism 510 can be prevented Furthermore, the inside di slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the outside diameters of the parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air spring member are formed to be substantially equal Thus, it becomes possibl misalignment in the direction orthogonal to axis 02 (the up dow Figure 41) when the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750 on the slider pedestal part 744 of the ambient air slider 740
Furthermore, while the outside shape of the valve outer circum 722 of the ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the in of the ambient air intake element 117, since valve protruding part 7 outward from the valve outer circumferential wall 722 of the ambient misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient operates in the direction of axis 02 can be prevented Therefor operation in the direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mec stabilized
Furthermore, when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed by the part 721a and moves in the direction of protruding part 811 (rightw 41), along with the movement, the first ambient air spring 730 und deformation so as to become compressed, and when the ambient ai depressed, the ambient air slider 740 moves in the direction of protru and the second ambient air spring 750 undergoes flexible deformation the state illustrated in Figure 41
When the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the case 40 of the multif 1, the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750 also u deformation, forming an ambient air intake path L illustrated by ambient air intake path L is a flow path passing successively thro formed between the joint passage 715 of the ambient air joint 710, the 727 of the ambient air valve 720, the first ambient air s rin 730
circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intake element 117 also the ambient air intake path Subsequently, as illustrated in Figure 1 passes through the first ambient air communicating chamber 431, c opening 433a, ambient air connection passage 433, communicating second ambient air communicating chamber 432, second communicating hole 435 and third ambient air communicating hol admitted inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 When the ambient air is opened, air is taken in such that the inside of the ink reservoir c brought to ambient air pressure
As described above the ink flow path K and the ambient air inta formed when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunct Furthermore the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and th intake mechanism 510 is such that they operate smoothly misalignment relative to the axes Ol and 02 Thus installation of the 14 is made easier while allowing the supply of ink and the intake of be carried out reliably
Next, referring to Figure 42 and Figure 43, the method of detectin of ink remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 will be described drawing illustrating the operation of the sensor arm 470 according to of ink remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 Figure 42 (a) illustr with remaining ink, while Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no r (ink empty) Figure 43 is a drawing schematically illustrating t principle of the sensor arm 470
The direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by force of the buoyancies and the gravities acting on the right side portio of the shielding arm part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the bal However, in order to simplify the explanation, the description will assuming that all of the forces, which are exerted on the sensor arm 4
state where the ink stored is at least above the level of the lower en circumference welded parts 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b) since the ba of the sensor arm 470 is formed from resin material with lower specifi the specific gravity of the ink, the buoyancy generated on the bal increases, and the balance part 471 floats in the ink When the bala inside the ink, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the combined force of t buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 cause a rotating force to the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl in Figure 43) but arm part 473c comes into contact with the arm supporting part 143 w the bottom wall 141a of the detection part 140 (enclosure part 14 placed in a position blocking the optical path between the light emi and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor state when ink is present, whereby the controller (not illust multifunction device 1 discriminates the presence of ink
As the ink inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 passes through the K and decreases in quantity, the liquid surface I of the ink drops surface I of the ink drops, the blocking arm part 473c emerges on the I of the ink, and subsequently, the balance part 471 also emerges surface I of the ink When the balance part 471 emerges on the liqu the ink, the buoyancy generated on the balance part 471, which cau arm 470 to rotate in the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl and the gravity generated on the balance part 471, which causes the s to rotate in the counterclockwise direction (the direction of arrow G2 balance each other out so the overall combined force is balanced Su the liquid surface I of the ink drops further the balance part 471 mo following the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterc rotating operation causes the shielding arm part 473c to move upwa the arm su ortin art 143, and an o tical ath is created betw
discrimination can be correctly made
As illustrated in Figure 42 (b), in the out of ink state, there is stil inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 The ink surface I at this ti higher than the part 400bl forming the bottom of the ink reservoir Furthermore, as discussed above, the ink reservoir chamber 111 and part 120 communicate via the ink supply chamber 426 (see Figure 15 the supply partition wall 422, and the ink reservoir chamber 111 and chamber 426 communicate via the second supply communicati positioned below the bottom part 400bl provided on the supply parti When the liquid surface I of the ink becomes lower than the s communicating hole 423 ambient air enters the area inside the su wall 422, making it impossible to supply ink Thus, in the present e detect the state immediately before ink supply becomes impossible a the sensor arm 470 is designed to rotate so that the out of ink sta when the liquid surface I of the ink is above the second supply comm 423 In this way positioning the second supply communicating hole part 400bl forming the bottom part of the ink reservoir chamber 1 possible to reliably prevent ink from running out before ink empt Furthermore, when an out of ink state is discriminated, there is har the bottom part 400bl of the ink reservoir chamber 111, with ink re mside the concave part space 424a, which is a relatively narrow spac location below the bottom part 400bl in the ink reservoir chamber 11 quantity of unused ink remaining when an out of ink state is detecte small, eliminating waste
Once the out of ink discrimination has been made to indicate to the device is out of ink, the out of ink lamp is illuminated or audio is the user that the device is out of ink It is also possible to use a count the controller to remember the number of times ink has been disc
of the supply path forming part 420 in the direction of installati cartridge 14 In the present embodiment, the ink supply part 120, intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged together on one s the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink suppl ambient air intake mechanism and remaining ink detection mech arranged together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1, p shape of the refill umt 13 from becoming complicated, and also red Furthermore the ink supply part 120, being a part which supplies ink to flow out to the multifunction device 1, is preferably arranged at the the ink cartridge 14 so as to provide for more complete utilization of the ambient air intake part 130, being a part which takes in ambie ink cartridge 14, is preferably arranged at the upper side of the ink Thus, from the standpoint of space efficiency, the detection part 140 arranged between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intak the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment configured in this position of the -center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is arranged ab same position as) the detection part 140, the length of the space balance part 417 and the attachment part 472 will become greater a arm 470 will become larger, and the storable quantity of ink will declin On the other hand, if the position of the center of rotation of the sens arranged below the ink supply part 120, the movable range of the bal will become extremely small, making detection of ink empty difficult present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of the sensor "pivot" consisting of the attachment part 472) is arranged above the in 120 and below the detection part 140 Consequently as described abo is reliably detected and reduction of the ink reservoir capacity due to i of the sensor arm 470 is avoided
Furthermore, in the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment,
make the arm part 473 larger so the balance part 471 will also h larger to ensure buoyancy of the balance part 471 Consequently, the which can be stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111, will decrease present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of the sen placed in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422 and the balan positioned at the middle of the ink reservoir chamber 111 in th avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor arm and adv ink flow
When the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm sandwiching part ink is available, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the top end surface o arm part 473c (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned parallel to the liquid surface of the ink In this state, when the liquid ink drops and reaches the same position as the top end surface of the 473c, the surface tension of the ink acts as a force to retain the shieldi the force by which the surface tension of the ink retains the shieldi greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, the sensor ar operate properly
Thus, in the present embodiment, the top end surface forming the detection part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle s downward, reducing- the portion of the shielding arm 473c that is parallel to the liquid surface of the ink Thus, the force exerted b tension of the ink on the shielding arm 473c can be reduced, allowi arm 470 to operate normally
Here, referring to Figure 44, the case where the ink cartridge 14 is wrong orientation will be discussed Figure 44 is a cross sectional vie the state where the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunctio wrong orientation
As illustrated in Fi ure 44 when the ink cartrid e 14 is inserted i
projection distance of the protrusion 55 from the back surface 56 of t the projection distance of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a fro is longer than the projection distance t8 of the needle 49 from the member 48 Providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9 prevents contact between the tip of the valve openi projecting outward from the ambient air intake part 130 and the tip o The needle 49 is a member for extracting the ink mside the ink ca supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrated) so if t where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately printing is not performed accurately Thus it is not desirable for the damaged or deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve open However, by providing a difference between projection distance t8 distance t9, as described above, collision between the needle 49 opening part 721a can be prevented, thus making it possible to prev deformation of the needle 49 and allowing the ink to be reliably suppl
Furthermore, the position of the through hole (detection window) detected part 140 and the case cutouts 213 and 223 in the vertical up down direction in Figure 44) is displaced slightly from the center, the ink cartridge 14 is installed upside down from the prope orientation, the remaining ink detection sensor 57 may collide with th the case 200, which may damage the remaining ink detection sensor since a difference is provided between projection distance t8 and proje t9, it becomes possible to prevent damage to the remaining ink detec due to collision with the outer wall of the case 200, making it possible detect the remaining quantity of ink
Next, referring to Figure 45, the method of removing the ink cart the installed state in multifunction device 1 will be described F drawin illustratin the method of removin the ink cartrid e
A portion of the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65 of arranged inside the concave parts 216a and 226a (concave part 226a i Figure 45 (a) and is thus not illustrated) of case 200, so when rotat release lever 63, the tip of the curved part 65b of the pullout membe contacts the latch parts 216b and 226b (latch part 226b is to the rea (b) and is thus not illustrated) of the case 200 (the state of Figure 45 door 41 is rotated further forward (in the direction of the arrow in from the state of Figure 45 (b), the latch parts 216b and 226b of th pulled out by the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65, and a por cartridge 14 projects from inside the case 40 as a result (the state of From this state, the user can easily remove the ink cartridge operability of the ink cartridge 14 replacement operation is improved
Here, referring to Figure 46, the mechanism for preventing drippi the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1 will Figure 46 is a drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartrid multifunction device 1 and a front view of the ink cartridge 14 Fig Figure 46 (b) are drawings illustrating the state change when the ink removed and Figure 46 (c) shows a front view of the ink cartridge 14
As discussed above, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifuncti needle 49 is inserted inside the ink supply part 120 The ink supply mechanis valve mechanism impelled by a first supply spring 630 and a second supply spri removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction device 1 (when going f Figure 46 (a) to the state of Figure 46 (b)), ink may adhere to the protruding tip or in the worst case, ink may flow out from the ink supply part 120 Since the v in the direction such that it contacts with the joint contact part 613 due to the i the first supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650 when the needl from the supply j oint 610, ink is pushed out in the direction such that it flo protruding part flow path 615b to the step part flow path 615a, so some ink
dripped ink can be made to adhere to the ink supply part 120 side case projecting parts 214a and 224a Furthermore, since the case p 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned relativel other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 12 case projecting parts 214a and 224a
As illustrated in Figure 46 (c), the insertion hole 605 of the suppl ink supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through w out and the thickness til in the widthwise direction (the left rig Figure 46 (c) the Z direction) of ink cartridge 14 of the case projecti and 224a is made longer than the diameter tlO of the insertion diameter of needle 49 is formed to be slightly narrower than the diam through hole 605 ) Furthermore, viewed vertically (form the Y insertion hole 605 is accommodated entirely within the region occupi projecting parts 214a and 224a Thus, when the ink cartridge 14 is re ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips down or if ink flows insertion hole 605, the dripped ink can be caught by the case projecti and 224a Furthermore since the case projecting parts 214a and horizontally (in the left right direction of Figure 46 (a) and (b)) in t orientation of ink cartridge 14, and the surface on the ink supply p formed to be substantially flat, the ink adhering to the case projecti and 224a can be prevented from dripping further down As a result, i prevent ink from dripping down into and dirtying the inside of the re the inside of the refill unit 13 is dirtied, the ink cartridge 14 may be installation or removal of the cartridge 14, thus making the user However such problems can be avoided by preventing the ink from a inside of the refill unit 13 as much as possible
While the configuration described above is desirable for preventi the confi uration is not limited thereto, so lon as, as illustrated in
cartridge 14 is made shorter than the length tlO in the widthwise d insertion hole 605, a configuration of this sort can contribute to the dirtying of the refill unit 13 In this case, the ink retaining forc projecting parts 214a and 224a is weakened, so it can be assumed t has been caught by the case projecting parts 214a and 224a may drip refill unit 13 However, the ink cartridge 14 to be replaced is hardly long time inside the refill unit 13 in a state with the tip of the needle 4 withdrawn from the ink supply part 120, being rather removed qui refill unit 13, so such a problem is unlikely to occur Incidentally, e case projecting parts 214a and 224a are formed to be narrow, if the in is installed in the wrong orientation, it will collide with the tip of the preventing incorrect installation Furthermore, even if the case pr 214a and 224a are not accurately positioned on line p, so long as the vertically below the ink supply part 120, they will be able to catch th down from the ink supply part 120 to some extent, making it possi dirtying of the inside of the refill unit 13 to a greater extent tha projecting parts 214a and 224a were not provided
Next, referring to Figure 47, the structure, which reduces the adh the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the 14, will be described Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the str reduces the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b o unit 140 of the ink cartridge 14 Figure 47 (a) illustrates the state o removing the ink cartridge 14 in/from the refill unit 13 (multifunct Figure 47 (b) is a drawing which illustrates the surface where the dete of the mk cartridge 14 is formed* and Figure 47 (c) is a perspectiv cartridge 14 The ink cartridge 14 of Figure 47 (a) is illustrated in sim without showing the detailed structure, as this figure serves to illust sha e of the ink cartridge 14 and its ositional relationshi to the
cartridge 14, causing the ink held inside the ink supply mechanism forcefully, and the fact that when the needle 49 is suddenly exposed from the state of being positioned inside the ink supply part 120 ( where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and sp spattering of ink does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 i removed, and most of the time no ink may spatter
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartrid installation orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned corresponding to the remaining ink detection sensor 57, so the detecti positioned above the ink supply part 120 (or needle 49) The major spattering from the needle 49 and ink supply part 120 spatters down to the direction of detection part 140) under its own weight, so the adh the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arranging the dete above the ink supply part 120 Furthermore, the detection surfaces 1 are formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the dete and the cap insertion hole 605 (see Figure 47 Ob)) The majority of the from the cap insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fash ink should spatter from the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will detection surfaces 140a and 140b, making it possible to reduce the a to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (b), if the ink cartridge during use and placed such that the positional relationship of the in 120 and ambient air intake part 130 is upside down relative to th orientation of the ink cartridge 14 (the orientation of Figure 47 (a)), down from the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 600 of the ink su Since the ink dripping form the insertion hole 605 flows under its own flow out in substantially linear fashion in the direction of the detectio adhere to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection art 1
material into a smooth plane, adhering ink can flow down easily Th possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the side surface of detect Furthermore, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed, the ink suppl located at the lower part and the ambient air intake part 130 is locate part (the orientation of Figure 47 (a)), so even if there is ink ad detection part 140 during installation or removal of the ink cartridge 1 flow to the ink supply part 120 side, making it possible to reduce the a to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Moreover as discussed above 40 of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b and the side surface 100 part 110 is formed substantially as a right angle, so ink adhering to surfaces 140a and 140b can more easily flow downward due to the capillary force of the edge part 140c Therefore, adhesion of ink to surfaces 140a and 140b can be reduced
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (c), the detection part 14 inside the case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is fo sides of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b by the case cutouts 213 a the detection part 140 is covered by the case 200, so even if ink s adhesion of the spattered ink to the detection surfaces 140a and reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply part 120 projects the case 200, in the installation orientation of ink cartridge 14 (the s 47 (a)), the distance to the detection part 140 becomes farther Thus, t the spattered ink does not reach the detection part 140, making it poss the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Further projecting parts 214a and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b formed at the ends, the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake located between the case projecting parts 214a and 224a and the c parts 214b and 224b and the case projecting parts 214a and 224a
unit 13 will be described Figure 48 is a drawing showing the front vi 40 Figure 48 (a) is a front view of case 40, which can accommodate black or a black ink cartridges 14 and color ink cartridges 14, and Fi front view of case 2040, which can accommodate black ink cartridge ink cartridges 14 In the present embodiment, case 40 is arr multifunction device 1, but it is also possible to provide a multifun wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of case 40 Figure 49 is a cross showing the simplified cross section of cases 40 and 2040
Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is cross sectional view of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 49 shows a cross section of needle forming member 48 and in with the other elements making up the cases 40 and 2040 being om illustration Furthermore, in Figures 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is ink cartridge 14c, a black ink cartridge is show as ink cartridge 14k capacity blackαnk cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 48 (a) case 40 is configured to accomm cartridges so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arran four ink cartridges, three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14k adjacent thereto In other words, the large capacity black ink cartrid black ink cartridge 14k 1 is selectively accommodated at an end p direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left right direction in The case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a large capa cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 48 (b), case 2040 is configured to acco arranged ink cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four i three color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a black
in Figure 48 (a)) of case 40 is longer than the lateral width tl5 (th direction of alignment of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k 1, the left rig Figure 48 Ob)) The difference between the lateral width tl4 of cas lateral width tl5 of case 2040 corresponds to the difference between the vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of the second case member 220 Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 222Oe of t member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
Furthermore, case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large ink cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 installation of black ink cartridge 14k 1 This implies providing users of multifunction device 1 As already discussed above, since users wh of text printing is low do not need a large capacity black ink cartri preferable to provide such users with a smaller multifunction device 1 allow installation of a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 Furth case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14k 1 and case 40 for in capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in external shape of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost red
As illustrated in Figure 49 (a), when the ink cartridges 14c accommodated in case 40 a needle 49 penetrates into the ink suppl 500 of each of the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2 The gaps tl6 between t penetrating the color ink cartridges 14c are equal, while the gap tl needle 49 penetrating into the large capacity black ink cartridge needle 49 penetrating the adjacent color ink cartridge 14c is formed to distance than gap tl6 The difference between gap tl6 and gap tl7 c the difference between the height of the vertical wall parts 210b to 21 case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the height of the verti 2210b to 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure 13
As illustrated in Figure 49 (b), when the ink cartridges 14c
case member 1210 of the black ink cartridge 14kl on the color ink cart thereby making the distance between the needle 49 penetrating into cartridge 14k 1 and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent color 14c the same as the distance between the needle 49 penetrating i capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 of case 40 and the needle 49 penetr adjacent color ink cartridge 14c In other words, this is because the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartridge 14kl and the position of the i 120 of ink cartridge 14k2 are the same relative to the position of the i 120 of the ink cartridge 14c As a result, identical needle forming me be provided in case 40 and case 2040 even through the lateral widths cases 40 and 2040 may differ, making the needle forming member component and making it possible to reduce costs when fabricating tw 40 and case 2040
Furthermore, as discussed above, the ink supply mechanism 5 mechanism impelled by the first supply spring 630 and second supply when the ink cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1, out from the ink supply part 120 or, in the worst case ink may spatte needles 49 are arranged continuously without any partition plates b between the needles 49, so when ink spatters from the ink supply spattered ink ends up adhering to the adjacent needles 49 The needle which supply ink to the multifunction device 1 so when a differen mixed into a needle 49, color change will occur during printing and pr will decline In the present embodiment, the black ink is a pigment t the color inks consist of dye type inks This is because black ink is used text printing, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low per paper in order to make the edges of the characters clear, while col primarily for image printing, so it is made from a dye type i permeability into paper in order to make the granularity of dots less
it has higher viscosity compared to dye type ink, so it cannot be easily if recovery processing is carried out However in the present embodi cartridges 14k 1 and 14k2 holding black ink are arranged at the end i of arrangement in the case 40, and the ink supply part 120 (and shifted away from the color ink cartridges 14c, so even if black ink s the spattered ink would be unlikely to adhere to the adjacent needle decline in printing quality can be suppressed, as can the wasting of l of ink for recovery processing
Next referring to Figure 50, the state of installation of the large ink cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartridg 40 will be described Figure 50 is a simplified cross section illustratin fashion the state of installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14k 1 and 14k2 i Figure 50 (a) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c insta and Figure 50 (b) illustrates the state of ink cartridges 14k2 and 14 case 40
As illustrated in Figure 50 (a), in the bottom plate part 42 and ceil 44 of the refill unit 13 (case 40), there are formed accommodating gr 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the case 216, 226 and 1216 and the case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of ca 1200 Accommodating grooves 42c 1 to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all same shape
Furthermore, the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and space between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separ tl2, while the space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42 separation distance tl3 longer than distance tl2 This is because, above, the black ink cartridge 14k 1 is formed with a larger outer s other color ink cartridges 14c so the ink supply part 120 and ambi part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a position shifted by
illustrated in Figure 13, or the difference between vertical wall parts the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the vertical wa to 121Oe of the first case member 1210 illustrated in Figure 11
Furthermore, a prescribed space X is formed between the outer second case 220 of the black ink cartridge 14k 1 and the inner surf plate part 43 This prescribed space X is formed to allow for the large ink cartridge 14k2 Namely as illustrated in Figure 50 (b), it serve refill unit 13 to be used for both the black ink cartridge 14kl and the black ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 50 (b), when a large capacity black ink car installed in the refill unit 13, the space that would be formed whe cartridge 14k 1 is installed becomes occupied Furthermore, the positi supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 are the same when 14kl is installed and when ink cartridge 14k2 is installed Thus, the can be used with black ink cartridges 14k 1 and 14k2, making it poss fabrication costs
Next, referring to Figure 51, the combination of components ma 200, 1200 and 2200 will be described Figure 51 is a schematic dr schematically illustrates the combination of case members 210, 220, 1 2220
Figure 51 (a) is a schematic drawing of case 200 According t embodiment, case 200 comprises first and second case members 210 the thicknesses of the first and second case members 210 and 220 vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b to 22Oe of the first an members 210 and 220» the left right direction in Figure 5l(a)) bein tl8
Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200 Case 2200 comp second case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the fir
220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 1210 and 220, direction in Figure 5l(c)) being tl9 for the first case member 1210 a second case member 220
Thus according to the present embodiment, three types of cases - 2200 — with different sizes of the outer shape (different inside volum from two first case members of different thickness and two second ca different thickness In the present embodiment, the thicknesses of second case members 210 and 220 forming case 200 are equal, and t of the first and second case members 2110 and 2220 forming case equal, but making the thicknesses equal in this manner is not an condition for forming three types of cases - 200, 1200 and 2200 - of shape sizes
Namely, so long as the thickness of one side (the first case memb case members making up the largest first ink cartridge (case 2200) i the thickness of one side (the first case member 210) of the case me up the smaller third ink cartridge (case 200), and the thickness of the second case member 2220) of the case members making up the la cartridge is greater than the thickness of the other side (the second 220) of the case members making up the smaller third ink cartridge, cases with different outer shape sizes can be fabricated from four c The conditions described above will be referred to as the first conditio further conditions to these first conditions, four types of cases can from four case members This will be described in detail later
Cases 200, 1200 and 2200 consist of resin material and are manufactur molding Thus, a die corresponding to each case 200, 1200 and 2200 is necessar of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases Namely, since and 2200 have a space inside them, at least two members are necessary to c them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid member,
case member 210 for color deeper and providing a rib 1218 Thus, the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 1218 in the first case used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertical wall 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore the first 1210 and 210 can be manufactured by using a common die for the the first case members 1201 and 210, and changing betwee corresponding to the first case member 210 and a member correspond case member 1210 Thus, costs can be reduced as compared to whe molds are fabricated Furthermore since the first case member 2 capacity black has the same shape as the first case member 1210 without the rib 1218, a common die can be used for the main portion o members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are multip cartridges 144c, 14kl and 14k2 a cost reduction can be achieved by dies as much as possible
Furthermore in cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from ea through holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta project to the outside are made the same shape, and substantially sem cutout parts 211, 212 221, 222, 1211, 1212, 2211, 2212, 22 corresponding to one half of these through holes are formed substantially semi circular shape in the first case member 210, secon 220, first case member 1210 for black, first case member 2210 for black and second case member 2220 for large capacity black a par structure can be used for each of the dies, reducing the costs of design
In the present embodiment, case 1200 was made from the second 220 of case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substanti shape as the first case member of case 2200 However, as illustrated i it is also possible to fashion a case 1200α from the first case member 2 and a second case member 1220 formed to substantially the same
combination of first case member 2210 and second case member 220 black In other words, so long as the combination of case members cases to be created - a small case for color, a large case for lager capaci medium sized case for black - any sort of combination may be used
Next, referring to Figure 52 a second embodiment will be describe a drawing illustrating the ink cartridge 3014 and refill unit 3013 embodiment Figure 52 (a) is a drawing illustrating the side surfa cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, and Figure 52 (b) shows th in the state with the ink cartridge 3014 installed in refill unit 3013
As illustrated in Figure 52 (a), the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon is configured with a different location of the ambient air intake compared to the ink cartridge 14 of the first embodiment In the ink c of the second embodiment, ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge an ambient air intake passage 3131 formed in a labyrinth shape through hole 3130 formed on the top surface of the case 3200
As illustrated in Figure 52 (b), the refill unit 3013 o embodiment is configured with the position of the pushing retaining provided on the door 41 being lower than the position of the push member 61 provided on the door 41 of the first embodiment This is be no air intake part on the side surface opposite the pushing retaining of the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment, and thus the elast when the ink cartridge 3014 is installed in the refill unit 3013 (the el to the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650) acts onl part of the ink cartridge 3014 Thus, in order to stably install the ink c inside the refill unit 3013, the pushing retaining member 3061 and t part 120 are configured to be substantially on the same line in t direction (the left right direction in Figure 52 Ob)) Being positioned su the same line, the direction in which the elastic force acts is also su
cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments Fig perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartrid third embodiment, and Figure 53 (b) is a perspective view illustratin appearance of ink cartridge 5014 of the fourth embodiment
As illustrated in Figure 53 (a), the ink cartridge 4014 of the thir has a through hole 4130 for admitting ambient air into the ink c formed in a portion of its top surface (the top surface in Figure 53 admitted through this through hole 4130 passes through a labyrin intake passage 4131 (a relatively long passage with a small inside di admitted inside the ink cartridge 4014 A seal member 4132 is glu cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow of the ink inside the 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal member 413 and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
The detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting out end surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the 4014 (the up down direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is fo supply part 4120 An ink supply opening 4121 into which needle 49 formed on the projecting tip of the ink supply part 4120 The ink car the third embodiment does not have a structure corresponding to element 100, and stores the ink directly inside the case
On the right side of Figure 53(a), there is a cross sectional diagram dashed line within the figure As illustrated in this figure, within t part 4120, there is a joint 4122 that forms the insertion part into whi 49 is inserted, a valve 4123 which fills the opening of the joint 4122 arranged in the direction on the inner side of the ink cartridge 401 4122, and a spring component 4124 which biases this valve 4123 in t oint 4122 As a result the valve mechanism that o ens and closed t
and the similarly shaped ink supply part 5120 The remaining structu as the ink cartridge in the third example of embodiment, and therefor explanation of this will be omitted
The detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of em contain the sensor arm 470 inside it, as in the first example of em contains the sensor arm 470, then in the state where the ink cartri 5014 have been attached to the multifunction device 1 it is possible detect the amount of ink remaining Also, in the third and fourt embodiment, the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed from the c parts 214a and 224b and the protrusion (first protrusion part) formed protruding parts 214b and 224b have been omitted, but it is accepta these
Next, the fifth example of embodiment will be described while referring to 55 Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in the embodiment, and Figure 55 is a cross sectional diagram showing the state i cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the re case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that its edg different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of the fi embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the edge part of the case protru and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of the ink car first example of embodiment, and using the same references for the parts that ar first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted
The case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protrud and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b an direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b B second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a and 21 truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as seen fro
protrusion 55 will correctly match the steps 214a4 and 224a4, for possible to consistently prevent problems in which the protrusion 55 p protruding parts 214a and 224a and goes to the upper side of the case 55 or to the lower side of the case protruding parts 214a and 224a in thus the ink cartridge 14 is further inserted toward the back side of t right side in Figure 55) Therefore, it is possible to consistently pr cartridge's striking the needle 49 and thus prevent destruction or defo needle 49 and the remaining ink detection sensor 57
The steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment ar L shape (or V or U shape) as seen from the side but it is also acce them corresponding to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In oth acceptable for it to be any shape desired as long as it is a shape that loose when attaching it in the wrong orientation and the edge of the fitted into the steps 214a4 and 224a4
Next the sixth example of embodiment will be described whil Figures 56 58 Figure 56 is a cross sectional diagram showing the stat ink cartridge 14 of the sixth example of embodiment has been inserte unit 13 Figure 57 is a block diagram showing a summary of the elect of the multifunction device 1 in the sixth example of embodiment flow chart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection process th by the CPU 971 The sixth example of embodiment has an additional attachment detection sensor 960 in relation to the multifunction devic example of embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the attachment detection sensor 960 of the sixth example of embodiment in the first example of embodiment, and therefore, using the same ref same items as in the first example of embodiment, the explanation o omitted
As illustrated in Fi ure 56 in the multifunction device 1 of the si
As illustrated in Figure 57, the control board 970 includes a C is the calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory th overwritten and which stores the control program and the fixed valu 973 which is the memory that can be overwritten and which is use memory, the EEPROM 974 which is the non volatile memory overwritten and which stores data even after the power source is tur interface 975 which performs electrical connections between the ex and the control board 970 the inkjet printer 976 which perform discharging ink as instructed by the CPU 971, the liquid crystal di which performs each type of display, the remaining ink detection se detects the amount of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and attachment detection sensor 960 that detects whether the ink cartrid attached or not, and the interface circuit 978 that performs input and type of signal While it is not illustrated in the figure, there are counters and timers included, the updating of the counter values an will be performed according to the processing performed within the C
Within the EEPROM 974, there is an ink cartridge attachment fl ink cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink ca been correctly attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink ca been removed Further, once the ink cartridge attachment flag 9 turned on, it will remain in the on state until it is turned off by the attachment detection sensor 960
The ink cartridge attachment detection process illustrated in Fi interruption process that is executed at the specific intervals (for ins ms) after completion of the initial set up process (not illustrated in th the power source has been turned on for the multifunction device 1 I explanation, the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will g rotrudin iece of the ink cartrid e attachment sensor is ressed, an
When the ink cartridge attachment detection process is execute confirm whether the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 96 (SlOl), and if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is then there is no ink cartridge 14 attached to the multifunction devic the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a to be 0 (S 102), the will display onto the liquid crystal display part 35 that the ink cartri been attached (S 103), and this process will end In the event multifunction device 1 is being used for the first time after shipping the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been set to 0
As the result of confirmation by the SlOl process, if the attachment detection sensor 960 is on (SlOl Yes), it means that the 14 has been attached and then this process will confirm whether th ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1 or not (S 104) In the event cartridge 14 is attached from the state of not being attached the va cartridge attachment flag 974a should be 0 (S 104 No), and then this confirm whether the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is on or not timing in which the ink cartridge 14 is attached (S 105) If the r detection sensor 57 is off (S 105 No), it means that the ink cartridge the state where the shielding arm part 473c has been removed fro light emitting part 57a and the light receiving part 57b has been a other words, the ink cartridge with little ink remaininghas b Therefore, ink empty display will be displayed on the liquid crystal d (S 112), and this process will end
On the other hand within the S 105 process, if the remaining sensor 57 is on (S 105 Yes), then this process will confirm whether t ink detection sensor 57 has been on or not for longer than the spe instance, greater than 10 s) (S 106) If the remaining ink detection been on for lon er than the s ecific time (S 105 Yes) it means that t
(S 107), and this process will end
Within the S 106 process, if the remaining ink detection sensor 5 on for longer than the specific time (S 106 No), next, this process whether or not the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 h longer than the specific time (for instance, 10 s) (S 108) As describ processing after "S 104 is No" is a process to be performed in the eve cartridge 14 is attached from the state of not being attached, and cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has already been on for lo specific time, there may be damage in the ink cartridge attachment de 960 Therefore, if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 h longer than the specific time (S 108 Yes), then an ink cartridg detection sensor abnormality will be displayed on the liquid crystal d (S 109), and this process will end
Within the S 108 process, unless the ink cartridge attachment de 960 is on for longer than the specific time (S 108 No), when because t the ink cartridge 14 has been correctly attached, the value of the attachment flag 974a will be set to 1 (S 110), and this process will words, the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 and the detection sensor 57 will change in approximately the same timing, value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 1, by detecti of the ink cartridge 14, it will be set to the state in which it is possible the multifunction device 1
Within the SIlO processing, when the ink cartridge attachment fl to 1 in the processing after that, the process of S 104 will go to Yes a to detect the remaimng ink within the ink cartridge 14 will be perfor words, within the Sill process, whether or not the remaining ink de 57 has become on or not will be confirmed, and if the remaining ink de 57 is on (Sill Yes), then there is ink within the ink cartridge 14, an
cartridge 14 has been attached or not
When each of the errors has been displayed and if there is an abn operation executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion b cartridge attachment flag 974a will be initialized to 0
As described above in the sixth example of embodiment, it is not o distinguish and detect the unattached state of the ink cartridge 14 ink is empty, it is also possible to detect any abnormalities in each when replacing the ink cartridge 14 as the ink cartridge attach sensor 960 will be turned off the value of the ink cartridge attach will be set to 0, and therefore, it is always possible to accurately detec ink cartridge 14 is attached or whether the ink is empty Also, when ink cartridge 14, when ink is adhered to the light emitting part 57 receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, it accurately detect any abnormalities of the remaining ink detection se attaching the ink cartridge 14 Also, when removing the ink cartridge cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is already broken, an ink will be displayed even though the ink cartridge 14 is not attached T possible for the user to recognize that there has been some sort occurrence If an abnormal deletion operation is performed, then beca of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 0, in the even cartridge 14 is attached next, then it is possible to display the abno ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960, making it possible made known to the user
As in the first example of embodiment, if there is no ink cartridg detection sensor 960, it is possible for the remaining ink detection detect the existence or lack of any remaining ink It is also po remaining ink detection sensor 57 to detect that the ink cartridge 14 i more correctly, that an ink cartridge with an enough amount of rema
ink cartridge 6014 in the seventh example of embodiment, and Fig angled view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 701 example of embodiment The ink cartridges 6014 and 7014 of th eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the shap surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will relation to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourt embodiment Therefore the structure other than the side surfaces on supply parts 4120 and 5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of e formed is the same as the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the thi examples of embodiment, and therefore, the same references for the the same as in the third and fourth examples of embodiment will be explanation of these is omitted As illustrated in Figure 59(a), there is a concave part 6100 formed supply part 4120 (above the ink supply part 4120 in the attached st cartridge 4120 (the state in Figure 59(a)) There is a detection part 6 the central position of this concave part 6100 Therefore, on bot detection part 6140, there is a space formed in which the light emi and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sen inserted
As illustrated in Figure 59(b) there is a concave part 7100 formed supply part 5120 (above the attached state of the ink cartridge 512 Figure 59(b)) There is a detection part 7140 formed in the central p concave part 7100 Therefore, on both sides of the detection part 71 space formed in which the light emitting part 57a and the light receivi the remaining ink detection sensor 57 can be inserted
Also, the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the ink cartridges 601 the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are arranged withi arts 6100 and 7100 formed on the side surfaces so it is ossible
of ink onto the detection parts 6140 and 7140
The detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eight embodiment can also contain sensor arms inside as in the firs embodiment By using a sensor arm 470, it is possible to accurat amount of ink remaining when the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 are the multifunction device 1
Next, referring to Figure 60, we will explain the ninth embodiment Figure 60 is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 13 of the ninth example of embodiment The same parts as in the fi embodiment have the same references attached and the explanation o omitted Also while the structure of the pullout member 65 of the d 60 in the ninth example of embodiment is different to that in the fi embodiment, the explanation of this will be omitted
As illustrated in Figure 60 the ink cartridge 8014 of the nint embodiment has a pushing part 8200a that is configured to contac retaining member 61 of the door main body 60 and that protrude outside from the side surface 1 of the ink cartridge 8014 In oth pushing part 200a of the first example of embodiment was one par range of the side surface 1 of the case 200, but the pressing part 8200 example of embodiment has the structure where there is a spec contacts the pressing retaining member 61 In the ninth example of the structure of the pushing part 8200a is such that it protrudes surface, but it is acceptable to form it in the opposite concave shape In pressing retaining member will be constructed such that it protrudes main body 61
Next, referring to Figures 61 63, the tenth example of embodi described Figure 61 is an angled diagram showing the external app
reservoir element 100 is replaceable
Further, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodime the same structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of em therefore only the structure that is different in relation to the ink c the first example of embodiment will be described and using the sa for the same parts as in the first example of embodiment the explan will be omitted
As illustrated in Figure 61, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tent embodiment has a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 9100 is attached onto the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa the second case member 220 and the vertical wall part 210c and t surface 210a of the first case member 210 In other words, the seal 91 to the side surface opposing the protector 300 (opposing the edge sur the ink supply part 120, the ambient air intake part 130 and the dete are located) The seal 9100 not only has the model of the ink cartridge it, but it also has imprinted on it the color corresponding to the ink col is possible to visually recognize the color of the ink that is stored cartridge 9014 Therefore by attaching this seal 9100, it is possible visually recognize the ink color, making it possible to prevent stora cartridge 9104 in the wrong accommodating chamber 50 within the ca
As illustrated in Figure 62, within the vertical wall part 210b of member 210, there are engagement parts 9200a and 9200b formed w in the direction of the second case member 220 (in the Z direction, or i direction in Figure 62) On the other hand, within the vertical wall pa second case member 220 there are engagement holes 9201a and which engage with the edges of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200
Therefore, when manufacturing the ink cartridge 9014, first, the element 100 is placed within the first case member 210, and fitting th
The ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has joining of the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 of the seal 9100 onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement ho 9201b , Therefore, by undoing the union of the engagement parts 92 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, it is possible to undo t between the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 I simply perform the undoing of the connection between the engageme and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b by pressing t engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement holes 920 from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case cu to 223 have been formed
Also, as illustrated in Figure 63, because one edge surface of the fi case members 210 and 220 are connected via the seal 9100, it is possi opening and closing operations using the edge of the vertical wall p 220c as an axis (an opening and closing operation in the arrow direc 63, or in the X direction) In other words, the seal part 9100 is a conne to connect the first and second case members 210 and 220, and it ser material, which can open and close the first and second case member Therefore, the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100 is undoing the connection between the engagement parts 9200a and 9 engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the second case memb with respect to the first case member 210, the new ink reservoir e inserted, and then, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are the present tenth example of embodiment, while the ink reservoir e replaced with new one, it is also acceptable to use a product in which re injected into the ink reservoir element 100
As described above the ink cartrid e 9014 of the tenth exam le o
be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the an ink cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contai attached, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating printing
Next, referring to Figure 64, the eleventh example of embodi described Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir eleme eleventh example of embodiment The ink reservoir element 9300 o example of embodiment is fixed within the first and second case me will omit a detailed explanation and description of the first an members
As illustrated in Figure 64, the ink reservoir element 9300 of example of embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is fo injection moldeing using a resin material, and a bag element 9 flexibility and which forms a reservoir space to store the ink inside, connected to the hard part 9301 The hard part 9301 has a d (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the light emitting the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 5 supply part including the ink supply mechanism 500 and the supply first example of embodiment
Therefore, the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh embodiment is manufactured using the hard part 9301 and the bag p therefore, it is possible to have a simplified structure in compariso where the entirety of the ink reservoir element is formed through a m resin material Therefore, it is possible to improve the yield when the ink reservoir element 9300, making it possible to achieve a manufacturing costs
The ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of e formed using the bag part 9302 which forms the reservoir space to stor so when the ink within the bag part 9302 is reduced the bag part 93
Therefore, while it is not possible to detect the amount of ink remain bag part 9302 it is possible to detect whether there is an ink reservoir contained within the first and second case members, and therefore, i prevent any printing processes from being performed by the multifu while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not contained within the fir case menbers
Above, the present invention was described based on the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and it is easy to reason that it would be possible to improvements or modifications within a scope that does not diverge fr of the present invention
Now referring to Figures 65 to 67, the modified examples of the co the case members will be described Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams modified examples of the combinations of the case members As descr the present example of embodiment, the three types of cases 200 1 and 2200 were formed with differing sizes for the outer shapes using of first case members 210 and first case members 1210 and 2210 thicknesses, and the two types of second case members 220 and secon 2220 with different thicknesses In place of this, the combinatio members in this modified example can be formed of four types differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where the int is different) First an explanation will be made while referring to illustrated in Figure 65(a), case Cl is formed of a case member 12 member r21 The thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the th case member r21 is t21 which is thicker than the thickness t20 As Fi ure 65(b), case C2 is formed of the case member 121 and the case
illustrated in Figure 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65( More specifically, case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and the r22, and case C4 is formed of the case member 121 and the case memb
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form th the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scal large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C4 are the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases Cl to C4 are all diffe relationship C1<C4<C3<C2 Therefore, it is possible to form fo different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be stored case members 120, r21, 121 and r22
In this way, in the manufacture of four types of cases with differin using the four case members requires a further second condition to b above first condition This second condition is that the difference (t22 the thickness t22 of one side of the case member (case member r22) w largest first ink cartridge (case C2) and the thickness t21 of one si member (case member r2l) that forms the smallest third ink cartridg different than the difference (t21 t20) between the thickness t21 of th the case member (case member 121) that forms the largest first ink the thickness t20 of the other side of the case member (case member 1 the smallest third ink cartridge For instance, if the first condition w second condition was not, then the thicknesses would be t20=10 mm and t22=40 mm (t22 t21=15 mm, t21 t20=15 mm), and the thickne the cases would be C 1=35 mm C2=65 mm, C3=50 mm, and C4=50 only cases with three types of sizes could be manufactured, and if bot second condition is met, then the thicknesses would be t20=10 mm, t2 t22=40 mm (t22 t21=20 mm, t21 t20=10 mm) and the thicknesses cases would be C 1=30 mm C2=60 mm, C3=50 mm, and C4=40 m possible to manufacture cases with four types of sizes
illustrated in Figure 66(c) and the case C6 illustrated in Figure 66( More specifically, the case C3 is formed of the case member 120 and th r22, and the case C6 is formed of the case member 121 and the case Further, the difference between the thickness t20 of the case membe thickness t22 of the case member r22 is different than the differenc thickness t21 of the case member 121 and the thickness t20 of the cas fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r20 which form th the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scal large scale case C2 and the two types of mid sized cases C3 and C6 are the size (thickness) of the outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 ar with the relationship C5<C6<C3<C2 Therefore, it is possible to fo with different outer shapes according to the amount of ink to be sto four case members 120, r21, 121 and r22
Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 6 illustrated in Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in explanation of this will be omitted here As illustrated in Figure 67 (b is formed of the case member 122and the case member r22 The thic case members 122 and r22 are formed of t22
By changing the combination of the case members 120 and r21 w case Cl and the case members 122 and r22 which form the case C7 illustrated in Figure 67(c) and the case C8 illustrated in Figure 67( More specifically, the case C3 is formed of the case member 120 member r22, and the case C8 is formed of the case member 122 and the r21 Further, the difference between the thickness t22 of the case me the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is different than the differ the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickness t20 of the 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
As described above, within the case members that form each c thickness of the case members that are placed on one side are diffe thicknesses of the case members that are placed on the other side, it form four cases with different outer sizes (different internal capaci four case members
Next, another modified example of the present example of embo explained In the above example of embodiment, by using the elastic and second supply springs 630 and 650 and the first and second ambie 730 and 750, the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 ar direction of the supply joint 610 and the ambient air joint 710 to bloc path K and the ambient intake path L In contrast it is also accepta elasticity of the coil spring member that is formed using either a meta resin material to urge the supply valve and the ambient air valve in t the supply joint and the ambient air joint to block the ink flow path an air intake path Also, as long as the coil spring is formed such that at of it is conical, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of th mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism Also, without usi slider 640 and the ambient air slider 740, it is acceptable to const supply spring 630 and the second supply spring 650 and the first ambi 730 and the second ambient air spring 750 such that they are direct each other, and further, to simplify the structure such that the sup ambient air intake valve are on the bottom plane By using this type is possible to simplify the ink supply mechanism and the ambie mechanism, making it possible to achieve a reduction in manufa Further, it is also acceptable to have a structure in which the first su air) spring and the second supply (ambient air) spring are connecte Also without using a valve hook 626 and 726 in the supply valve ambient air valve 720 it is acce table to connect the su l (ambient
683 and the second cover through hole 684 of the cover 680 Also, it is construct the cover 680 without the second cover through hole 684
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while the space bet protruding part 614 and the joint contact part 613 of the supply j formed in a circular base form, it is also acceptable to form a groo periphery of the joint contact part of the supply joint Because any di the joint protruding part will be absorbed by this groove, it is poss displacement in the insertion direction of the joint contact part as th inserted Further, by increasing the inner diameter of the joint co relation to the inner diameter of the joint protruding part, it is poss any transmission of the displacement of the joint protruding par contact part Also, in the above example of embodiment, while a fdm 160 wa both sides of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b of t 110, it is acceptable to close one opening using the side wall, and to 160 onto only the other opening In this case, the second opening 112b by the side wall, and by having the construction in which the film 16 the first opening 112a, it is possible to form a film 160 on the sid ambient air connection passage 433, making it possible to reduce the meniscus on the ambient air connection passage 433 Also, in the case second opening 112b with the side wall, that side wall will beco substrate, and as this will provide the strength of the frame part it is have a construction in which the connection formation part (partition is connected within the ink reservoir chamber, is not used In th acceptable to have an internal weld part only from one surface side substrate
Also, in the above example of embodiment, the film 160 that is we frame 110 was constructed of a nylon layer on the frame part 110 side
communicating passage 433 is constructed of a film 160, it is possible formation of a meniscus within the ambient air communicating Therefore, it is acceptable to have a construction in which the communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily slop and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in t the ink cartridge 14 is attached
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while all of the wel were performed using ultrasonic welding, in the case that it is possi attachment using an adhesive, it is acceptable to make all attachm adhesive, and it is also acceptable to use a different welding method fo instance, the welding of the case 200 can be substituted with attach adhesive as it is only important to ensure that the first and second 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability
The unit of ink cartridges of the present invention is widely used office uses
Claims
1 A unit of ink cartridges comprising at least three types of ink cartridges having different sizes, wherein each ink cartridge comprises a first casing member casing member, the casing members are connected to each other to having a substantial rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an ink st is provided within the casing, each casing member has a plate member and an extended member forming a first surface which has a largest area of the casi substantial rectangular parallelepiped shape, the extended wall b substantially vertically from an outer edge of the plate member a surface next to the first surface of the casing) the at least three types of ink cartridges comprises a first ink cartridg cartridge and a third ink cartridge, the first ink cartridge is larger in size than cartridge, and the second ink cartridge is larger in size than the third ink cartridg the first casing member of the first ink cartridge has a higher than the extended wall of the first casing member of the third ink cart second casing member of the first ink cartridge has a higher extended second casing member of the third ink cartridge, the first casing member of the second ink cartridge is the sa casing member of the first ink cartridge, and the second casing second ink cartridge is the same as the second casing member of cartridge
2 The unit of ink cartridges according to claim 1, wherein each c further has a first cutaway portion, the first cutaway portion is forme end of the extended wall for forming a penetration opening comm inside of the casing with the outside of the casing
3 The unit of ink cartridges according to claim 2, wherein th
member of the third ink cartridge
5 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to height of the extended wall of the first casing member of the first in the same as the height of the extended wall of the second casing mem ink cartridge, and the height of the extended wall of the first casing third ink cartridge is the same as the height of the extended wall casing member of the third ink cartridge
6 The unit of ink cartridges according to one of claims 1 to 5, respective height of the extended wall of the casing members of cartridge is twice the height of the extended wall of the correspo members of the third ink cartridge
7 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to difference between the height of the extended wall of the first casing first ink cartridge and the height of the extended wall of the first casi the third ink cartridge is different from the difference between the extended wall of the second casing member of the first ink cartridge a of the extended wall of the second casing member of the third ink cart
8 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to 7 first casing member of the first ink cartridge has a rib extended fr member along a height direction of the extended wall, wherein a hei corresponds to the difference between the height of the extended wa casing member of the first ink cartridge and the height of the extend first casing member of the third ink cartridge
9 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 to defining wall is integrally formed with each of the casing members, wall forming an accommodation space for accommodating a valve mec opens and closes the penetration opening
10 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 2
member comprises an air introducing part which introduces air into t member and which is extended parallel with the ink supplying par extended wall of each of the casing members has a second cutaway same plane in which the first cutaway portion is formed the se portions of the casing members forming a penetration opening thro air introducing part is extended to the outside of the casing
12 The unit of ink cartridges according to claim 11, wherein t member comprises an irradiated part extended parallel with the ink between the ink supplying part and the air introducing part, wherein part is configured to be irradiated with light emitted from an provided in an ink jet recording apparatus when the ink cartridge is ink jet recording apparatus, wherein the extended wall of each casing third cutaway portion in the same plane in which the first cuta formed, the third cutaway portions of the casing members forming opening through which the irradiated part is exposed to the outside o
13 The unit of ink cartridges according to any one of claims 1 t the casing members are formed of a resin material
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN2006800065512A CN101132925B (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2006-09-25 | Ink cartridge unit |
Applications Claiming Priority (10)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005-284646 | 2005-09-29 | ||
| JP2005284646A JP4539517B2 (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2005-09-29 | ink cartridge |
| JP2005342697 | 2005-11-28 | ||
| JP2005-342697 | 2005-11-28 | ||
| JP2005377987 | 2005-12-28 | ||
| JP2005-377987 | 2005-12-28 | ||
| JP2006064972A JP4524677B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2006-03-09 | Ink cartridge set |
| JP2006-064972 | 2006-03-09 | ||
| JP2006-081806 | 2006-03-23 | ||
| JP2006081806A JP4479684B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2006-03-23 | ink cartridge |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2007037445A1 true WO2007037445A1 (en) | 2007-04-05 |
| WO2007037445A9 WO2007037445A9 (en) | 2007-05-24 |
Family
ID=37744358
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2006/319609 Ceased WO2007037445A1 (en) | 2005-09-29 | 2006-09-25 | Unit of ink cartridges |
Country Status (4)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP1772275B1 (en) |
| AT (1) | ATE408512T1 (en) |
| DE (2) | DE202006020593U1 (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2007037445A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS58501894A (en) * | 1981-11-12 | 1983-11-10 | ツインツマイヤ−・ウント・ルクス・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト | Case with basic frame components without obstructions |
| JP2001121720A (en) * | 1989-03-24 | 2001-05-08 | Canon Inc | Ink tank |
| JP2002019136A (en) * | 2000-07-04 | 2002-01-23 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink cartridge for recorder |
| JP2002103647A (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2002-04-09 | Canon Inc | Ink tank module, ink tank connecting member, and ink jet recording apparatus |
Family Cites Families (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CA2051964C (en) * | 1990-09-22 | 2000-08-22 | Kenichirou Hashimoto | Ink cartridge and ink jet apparatus usable with ink cartridge |
| JP3133906B2 (en) * | 1993-08-19 | 2001-02-13 | キヤノン株式会社 | Ink tank cartridge |
| JPH1158792A (en) | 1997-08-21 | 1999-03-02 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink jet recording apparatus and ink cartridge used for the same |
| JP2001071522A (en) | 1999-09-03 | 2001-03-21 | Canon Inc | Liquid containers and printing equipment |
| US7188937B2 (en) * | 2004-01-29 | 2007-03-13 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Printing-fluid venting assembly |
-
2006
- 2006-06-23 EP EP06012997A patent/EP1772275B1/en not_active Ceased
- 2006-06-23 DE DE202006020593U patent/DE202006020593U1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2006-06-23 DE DE602006002795T patent/DE602006002795D1/en active Active
- 2006-06-23 AT AT06012997T patent/ATE408512T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2006-09-25 WO PCT/JP2006/319609 patent/WO2007037445A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS58501894A (en) * | 1981-11-12 | 1983-11-10 | ツインツマイヤ−・ウント・ルクス・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト | Case with basic frame components without obstructions |
| JP2001121720A (en) * | 1989-03-24 | 2001-05-08 | Canon Inc | Ink tank |
| JP2002019136A (en) * | 2000-07-04 | 2002-01-23 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink cartridge for recorder |
| JP2002103647A (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2002-04-09 | Canon Inc | Ink tank module, ink tank connecting member, and ink jet recording apparatus |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| DE602006002795D1 (en) | 2008-10-30 |
| EP1772275A3 (en) | 2007-05-16 |
| ATE408512T1 (en) | 2008-10-15 |
| EP1772275B1 (en) | 2008-09-17 |
| DE202006020593U1 (en) | 2009-04-23 |
| WO2007037445A9 (en) | 2007-05-24 |
| EP1772275A2 (en) | 2007-04-11 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2007037536A1 (en) | Ink cartridge and method for replacing ink reservoir element in ink cartridge | |
| US7828421B2 (en) | Ink cartridge arrangements | |
| CN101132922A (en) | Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus | |
| WO2007037451A1 (en) | Ink cartridge, ink jet recording system and set of ink cartridges | |
| US8025376B2 (en) | Ink cartridges | |
| WO2007037548A1 (en) | Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof | |
| US7810916B2 (en) | Ink cartridges | |
| US7553007B2 (en) | Ink cartridges | |
| WO2007037449A1 (en) | Ink cartridge, and system including ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus | |
| WO2007037445A1 (en) | Unit of ink cartridges | |
| WO2007037528A1 (en) | Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus | |
| EP1772272B1 (en) | Ink cartridge | |
| WO2007037527A1 (en) | Ink cartridge and printer | |
| US7682004B2 (en) | Ink cartridges | |
| US7837311B2 (en) | Ink cartridges | |
| EP1772276B1 (en) | Ink cartridge with light-receiving and light-blocking portion |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 200680006551.2 Country of ref document: CN |
|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application | ||
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 06810964 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |